TM-11-6625-422-12
TM 11-6625-422-12
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY TECHNICAL MANUAL
OPERATOR AND ORGANIZATIONAL
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TEST SETS, TELETYPEWRITER
AN/GGM-1, AN/GGM-2, AN/GGM-3,
AN/GGM-4, AND AN/GGM-5
This copy is a reprint which includes current
pages from Changes 1 and 3 through 8
HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
OCTOBER 1961
TM 11-6625-422-12
C8
Changes in force: C 1, C 3, C 4, C 5, C 6, C 7, and C 8
CHANGE
No. 8
}
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
WASHINGTON, D. C., 6 May 1974
Organizational Maintenance Manual
Including Repair Parts List
TEST SETS, TELETYPEWRITER AN/GGM-1, AN/GGM-2,
AN/GGM-3, AN/GGM-4, AND AN/GGM-5
TM 11-6625422-12, 6 October 1961, is changed as
follows:
The title is changed to read as shown above.
Page 3, paragraph 2.
Delete paragraph 2 and
substitute:
c. Discrepancy in Shipment Report (DISREP) (SF
361). Fill out and forward Discrepancy in Shipment
Report (DISREP) (SF 361) as prescribed in AR 5538/NAVSUPINST 4610.33/AFM 75-18/MCO P4610.19A,
and DSAR 4500.15.
2. Forms and Records
2.1. Reporting of Errors
The
reporting
of
errors,
omissions,
and
recommendations for improving this publication by the
individual user is encouraged. Reports should be
submitted on DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes
to Publications and Blank Forms) and forwarded direct
to Commander, US Army Electronics Command, ATTN:
AMSEL-MA-C, Fort Monmouth, NJ 07703.
a. Reports of Maintenance and Unsatisfactory
Equipment. Maintenance forms, records, and reports
which are to be used by maintenance personnel at all
maintenance levels are listed in and prescribed by TM
38-750.
b. Report of Packaging and Handling Deficiencies.
Fill out and forward DD, Form 6 (Report of Packaging
and Handling Deficiencies) as prescribed in AR 70058/NAVSUP PUB 378/AFR 71-4/ and MCO P4030.29.
Page 5, paragraph 5.
substitute:
Delete paragraph 5 and
5. Items Comprising an Operable Equipment
Dimensions (in.)
FSN
QTY
Nomenclature, part No., and mfr code
Usable
on
code
NOTE
In the Usable on code column,
number 1 refers to items comprising
an operable AN/G.GM-1; number 2
refers to items comprising an
operable AN/GGM-2; number 3 refers
to items comprising an operable
AN/GGM-3; number 4 refers to items
comprising an operable AN/GGM-4;
number 5 refers to items comprising
an operable AN/GGM-5.
1
Weight
(lb)
Height
Depth
Width
Dimensions (in)
FSN
Qty
6625-893-1725
6625-893-1726
6625-893-1727
6625-893-1728
6625-893-1735
Nomenclature, Part No., and Mfr Code
Usable
on code
Test Set, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-1
Test Set, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-2
Test Set, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-3
Test Set, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-4
Test Set, Teletypewriter AN,GGM-5
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
(lb)
19
57
19
12 1/4
12 1/4
20
29
20
20
20
19
25
19
19
19
97
189
91
68
55
5 1/4
5 1/4
19
19
8
8
12
12
12 1/4
9 3/4
12 1/4
19
7
19 1/4
8
8
19
28
14
12
12 ¼
19 1/4
19
11
6 1/2
6 1/2
19 1/4
19 1/4
19
19
7
10
12 ¼
11 ½
8
15
NOTE
The part number is followed by the
applicable 5-digit Federal supply
code for manufacturers (FSCM)
identified in SB 708-42, and used
to
identify
manufacturer,
distributor,
or
Government
agency, etc.
6625-061-2040
1
6625-061-2041
1
5995-086-7300
1
6150-889-0872
1
5995-889-0866
1
6625-893-1733
6625-893-1730
6625-893-1731
1
1
6625-893-1732
6625-893-1734
6625-573-3875
6625-573-3873
6625-573-3871
6625-573-3872
6625-893-1729
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Cable Assembly, Special Purpose, Electrical:
CX-8411/GGM; 80058
Cable Assembly, Special Purpose, Electrical:
CX-8412/GGM; 80058
Cable Assembly, Special Purpose, Electrical:
CX-8413/GGM; 80058
Cable Assembly, Special Purpose, Electrical:
CX-8414GGM-2; 80058
Cable Assembly, Special Purpose, Electrical:
8415/GGM-2; 80058
Cart, Teletypewriter Test Set: D10010; 96238
Generator, Test Pattern SG-431/GGM: 80058
Generator Time Base SG430(P)/GM: 80058
(Not issued with equipment, to be requisitioned by used)
Oscilloscope OS-119/GGM; 80058
Power Supply PP-2971/GGM: 80058
Rack, Shelf Adapter: RS-1A/DAC-V; 96238
Rack, Shelf Adapter: RS-1B/DAC-V; 96238
Rack, Shelf Adapter: RS-2A/DAC-V; 96238
Rack, Shelf Adapter: RS-2B/DAC-V; 96238
Test Set, Teletypewriter TS1512/GGM: 80058
1,2,3,4,5
1,2,3,4,5
1,2,3,4,5
2
2
2
1, 3
1,3,4,5
1,3,4
1,3,4,5
1,3,4
5
1
3
1,3,4,5
Page 68, paragraph 51.2. Delete "App. II and" in Page 100. Delete appendix II. line 1 of the Reference column.
2
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
CREIGHTON W. ABRAMS
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Official:
VERNE L. BOWERS
Major General, United States Army
The Adjutant General
Distribution:
Active Army:
USASA (2)
CNGB (1)
TSG (1)
ACSC-E (2)
USAMB (10)
USARENBD (1)
TRADOC (2)
AMC (1)
MICOM (1)
TECOM (2)
HISA (18)
ARADCOM (2)
ARADCOM Rgn (1)
OS Maj Comd (2)
USACC (2)
USACC-ONUS (5)
Armies (1)
Ft Huachuca (5)
Ft Carson (5)
Ft Richardson (ECOM Ofc) (1)
WSMR (1)
USASESS (10)
Svc Colleges (1)
AD (1) except
SAAD (30)
TOAD (14)
LBAD (10)
ATAD (10)
USA Dep (1)
Sig Sec USA Dep (2)
Sig Dep (2)
USAERDAA (1)
USAERDAW (1)
Sig FLDMS (1)
Units org under fol TOE: I e!
11-97
11-98
11-117
11-500(AA-AC)
29-134
29-136
ARNG & USAR: None.
For explanation of abbreviations used, see AR 310-50.
3
TM 11-6625-422-12
*C 7
Changes in force: C 1, C 3, C 4, C 5, C 6, and C7
CHANGE
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
WASHINGTON, D.C., 14 July 1967
No. 7
Organizational Maintenance Manual
Including Repair Parts List
TEST SETS, TELETYPEWRITER AN/GGM-1, AN/GGM-2, AN/GGM-3,
AN/GGM-4, AND AN/GGM-5
TM 11-6625-422-12, 6 October 1961 is changed as follows:
Paragraph 2 (page 1 of C 6).
subparagraph c and substitute:
The title of this manual is changed as shown above.
Note
The parenthetical reference to a
previous change (example: page 1 of
C 6) indicates that pertinent material
was published in that change.
Page 3. Make the following changes:
Paragraph 1.1 (page 1 of C 3).
Delete
paragraph 1.1 and substitute:
Delete
c. Reporting of Equipment Manual Improvements.
Report of errors, omissions, and recommendations for
improving this manual by the individual user is
encouraged. Reports should be submitted on DA Form
2028 (Recommended Changes to DA Publication) and
forwarded direct to: Commanding General, U.S. Army
Electronics Command, ATTN: AMSEL-MRNMP-AD,
Fort Monmouth, N.J., 07703.
1.1. Indexes of Equipment Publications
Page 5, paragraph 5 (page 1 of C 3).
subparagraph a and substitute:
a. DA Pam 310-4. Refer to the latest issue of DA
Pam 310-4 to determine whether there are new
additions, changes, or additional publications pertaining
to the equipment. DA Pam 310-4 is an index of current
technical manuals, technical bulletins, supply manuals
(types 7, 8, and 9), supply bulletins, and lubrication
orders available through publications supply channels.
The index lists the individual parts (-10, -20, -35P, etc.)
and the latest changes to and revisions of each
equipment publication.
Delete
a. The components of the AN/GGM-(*) are listed in
appendix II.
Page 7, paragraph 7a, line 2 (page 1 of C 5).
Delete "paragraph 5a" and substitute: Appendix II.
Page 68, paragraph 51.2 (chart) (page 2 of C 4).
Change "App. III" to App II.
b. DA Pam 310-7. Refer to DA Pam 310-7 to
determine whether there are Modification Work Orders
(MWO's) pertaining to the equipment. DA Pam 310-7
lists all authorized Department of the Army modification
work orders, identifying the type, model, series, and
Federal stock number of the item to be modified;
number, date, and classification of the MWO; categories
of maintenance authorized to perform the modification;
and the man hours required to apply the modification to
each item.
Page 100, appendix I (page 4 of C 4). Make the
following changes:
Delete all reference to "AR 40-580" and "DA
Pam 310-21". Add the following:
DA Pam 310-7
*This change supersedes C 2, 10 January 1963.
TAGO 5671A
1
U.S. Army Equipment Index of
Modification Work Orders.
SB 11-573
Painting and Preservation
Supplies Available for
Field Use for Electronics
Command Equipment.
Change the following titles:
"DA Pam 108-1" Index of Army Films,
Transparencies,G T A,
Charts, and Recordings.
"DA Pam 810-4" Index of Technical Manuals,
Technical Bulletins,
Supply Manuals (types
7, 8, and 9), Supply Bulletins, Lubrication Orders, and Modification
Work Orders.
“FM 21-5”
Military Training Management.
“TM 38_750”
Army Equipment Record
Procedures.
Appendix II (page 3 of C 6). Delete appendix II and substitute:
AGO 5671A
2
APPENDIX II
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS
Section I. INTRODUCTION
Code
R
1. General
This appendix lists items for Test Sets,
Teletypewriter AN/GGM-1, AN/GGM-2, AN/ GGM-3,
AN/GGM-4, and AN/GGM-5, the component items
comprising it, and the items which accompany it, or are
required for installation, operation, or operator's
maintenance.
b. Federal Stock Number, Column 2. The Federal
stock number for the item is indicated in this column.
2. Explanation of Columns
An explanation of the columns in sections II, III, IV,
V, and VI is given below.
c. Description, Column 3. The Federal item name,
a five-digit manufacturer's code, and a part number are
included in this column.
a. Source, Maintenance, and Recoverability Codes,
Column 1.
d. Unit of Issue, Column 4. The unit used as a
basis of issue (e.g. ea, pr, ft, yd, etc.) is noted in this
column.
(1) Source code, column 1a. The selection
status and source for the listed item is noted
here. The source code used is:
Code
P
e. Quantity Incorporated in Unit Pack, Column 5.
Not used.
Explanation
Applies to repair parts which are
stocked in or supplied from the
GSA/DSA, or Army supply
system, and authorized for use at
indicated maintenance categories.
f. Quantity Incorporated in Unit, Column 6. The
total quantity of the item used in the equipment is given
in this column.
g. Quantity Authorized, Column 7. The total
quantity of an item required to be on hand and
necessary for the operation and maintenance of the
equipment is given in this column.
Items to be
requisitioned as required are indicated by an asterisk (*).
(2) Maintenance code, column 1b. The lowest
category of maintenance authorized to
install the listed item is noted here. The
maintenance code used is as follows:
Code
C
Explanation
Applies to repair parts and
assemblies that are economically
repairable at DSU and GSU
activities and are normally
furnished by supply on an
exchange basis.
h. Illustration, Column 8.
Explanation
Operator/Crew
(1) Figure number, column 8a. The number of
the illustration in which the item is shown in
this manual is indicated in this column.
(3) Recoverability code, column 1c.
The
information in this column indicates
whether unserviceable items should be
returned for recovery or salvage.
Recoverability code and its explanation is
as follows:
(2) Item or symbol number, column 8b. The
callout number used to reference the item in the
illustration appears in this column.
Note.
When no code is indicated in the
recoverability column, the part will
be considered expendable.
AGO 5671A
3
73445.................. Amperex Electronic Corp.
80058.................. Joint Electronic Type Designation
System
80063.................. Army Electronics Command
80131.................. Electronic Industries Association
81349.................. Military Specifications
82376.................. Astron Corp.
96238.................. Stelma, Inc.
3. Federal Supply Codes
This paragraph lists the Federal supply code with the
associated manufacturer's name.
Code
Manufacturer' name
00656.................. Aerovox Corp.
04773.................. Automatic Electric Co.
08806.................. General Electric Co.
Lamp Dept.
Miniature
AGO 5671A
4
(A)
S
O
U
R
C
E
C
D
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
(1)
(B)
M
A
I
N
T
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
UN
PK
QTY
INC
IN
UNIT
QTY
INC
IN
QTY.
AUTH
ILLUSTRATIONS
(C)
R
E
C
(2)
(3)
MODEL
D
C
C
O
D
E
FEDERAL
STOCK
NUMBER
C
R 6625-893-1725
C
6625-061-2040
C
6625-061-2041
C
5995-086-7300
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
5910-889-4363
5910-865-3009
5910-060-6708
5960-503-4880
5960-262-3763
5960-272-8553
5960-681-9802
5960-715-3894
DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
4
5
(A)
(B)
FIG.
NO.
ITEM OR
SYMBOL
NO.
6
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN/GGM-1: 80058 (This item
is nonexpendable.)
TECHNICAL MANUAL TM 11-6625-422-12
Requisition through pinpoint account number if
assigned; otherwise through nearest Adjutant General
facilities.
NOTE: For technical manuals the quantity indicates
the maximum number of copies authorized for packing
(or issue) with the equipment. Where a number of
these equipments are concentrated in a small area, the
quantity on hand may be reduced to practical levels.
Excess publications must be returned to publication
supply central through AG channels.
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL PURPOSE, ELECTRICAL:
CX-8411/GGM; 80058 (This item is nonexpendable.)
CABLE ASSEMBLY. SPECIAL PURPOSE, ELECTRICAL:
CX-8412/GGM; 80058; (This item is nonexpendable.)
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL PURPOSE, ELECTRICAL:
CX-8413/GGM; 80058 (This item is nonexpendable.)
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 82376; EYT12251
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 00656; AFH3-29-95
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 82376; EYT1220
ELECTRON TUBE: 81349; OA2WA
ELECTRON TUBE: 81349; OB2WA
ELECTRON TUBE: 80131; 1X2B
ELECTRON TUBE: 81349; 6AU6WB
ELECTRON TUBE: 73445; 6DJ8
ea
1
ea
1
ea
1
1
ea
1
1
ea
1
1
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
7
7
38
38
38
38
38
C31
C29
C30
V17
V16,V18,V19
V15
V9
V3, V8
AGO 5671A
5
(A)
S
O
U
R
C
E
(1)
(B)
M
A
I
N
T
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
UN
PK
QTY
INC
IN
UNIT
QTY
INC
IN
QTY.
AUTH
ILLUSTRATIONS
(C)
R
E
C
C
O
D
E
(2)
(3)
MODEL
FEDERAL
STOCK
NUMBER
C
D
D
C
P
P
P
P
C
C
C
C
5960-669-8921
5960-262-0210
5960-669-6838
5960-855-2875
P
C
P
P
P
P
DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
4
5
(A)
(B)
FIG.
NO.
ITEM OR
SYMBOL
NO.
6
ea
ea
ea
ea
2
2
4
1
1
1
2
1
38
38
38
38
V6, V11
V5, V10
V1,V2,V4,V7
V14
5920-296-0451
AN/CCM-1 (continued)
ELECTRON TUBE: 80131; 12BH7A
ELECTRON TUBE: 81349; 5814A
ELECTRON TUBE: 81349; 5963
ELECTRON TUBES, MATCED: C/o 1 each GV3A, 1 each
GV6A; 96238; A6473
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 81349; FO2A250V1-8A
ea
9
10
C
C
5920-280-5031
5920-280-4465
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 81349; F02GR250A
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 81349; F02A250V1AS
ea
ea
1
3
5
10
C
C
C
5920-284-6785
5920-060-2424
R 6625-893-1730
ea
ea
ea
1
2
1
5
3
1
F1, F2, F4
F2, F3
F1, F2
F2, F4
F3
F3
F1
F1
F1
F3, F4
C
R 6625-893-1731
ea
1
1
1
P
C
6240-020-5730
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 81349; F02D2ROOB
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 81349; F02A250V5AS
GENERATOR, TEST PATTERN SG-431/GGM: 80058; (installed
in equipment) (This item is nonexpendable.)
GENERATOR, TIME BASE SG-430(P)/GGM: 80058 (installed
in equipment)(This item is nonexpendable.)
LAMP, CARTRIDGE: 96283; 9520
16
13
29
8
8
16
13
8
10
29
1
ea
13
4
34
P
C
6240-887-4770
LAMP, CARTRIDGE: Marked Var; 96238; B9520/VAR
ea
1
1
34
DS-1 thru DS-7
DS-10 thru DS14
DS-8 (Var)
AGO 5671A
6
(A)
S
O
U
R
C
E
(1)
(B)
M
A
I
N
T
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
UN
PK
QTY
INC
IN
UNIT
QTY
INC
IN
QTY.
AUTH
ILLUSTRATIONS
(C)
R
E
C
(2)
(3)
MODEL
C
O
D
E
FEDERAL
STOCK
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
C
6240-892-4420
AN/GGM-1 (continued)
LAMP, GLOW: 08806; NE2D
ea
5
1
27
34
26
P
C
6240-722-6467
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: 80063; SM-B-369238
ea
2
1
P
C
C
C
6240-683-0560
R 6625-893-1732
R 6625-893-1734
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: 08806; 345
OSCILLOSCOPE OS-119/GGM: 80058 (Installed in equipment)
POWER SUPPLY PP-2971/GGM: 80058 (Installed in
equipment)
RACK, SHELF ADAPTER: 96238; RS-1A/DAC-V (Installed
in equipment) (This item is nonexpendable.)
RACK, SHELF ADAPTER: 96238; RS-2A/DAC-V (Installed
in equipment) (This item is nonexpen
dable.)
RELAY, ARMATURE: 8 pin; 80063; SM-D-349110-3
RELAY, ARMATURE: 11 pin; 04773; 202PTW (NOTE: Can be
requisitioned if required; see pages 19, 23, 36 of
TM 11-6625-422-12.)
TEST SET, TEL PEWRITER TS-1512/GGM (Installed in
equipment) (This item is nonexpendable.)
NO ACCESSORIES, TOOLS OR TEST EQUIPMENT ARE TO BE
ISSUED WITH THIS EQUIPMENT
NO BASIC ISSUE ITEMS ARE MOUNTED IN OR ON THIS
EQUIPMENT
ea
ea
ea
1
1
1
1
1
1
27
26
33
1
1
P
P
6625-573-3875
C
C
5945-542-7058
5945-088-1621
C
6625-893-1729
4
5
ITEM OR
SYMBOL
NO.
P
6625-573-3871
3
FIG.
NO.
D
C
C
2
(B)
C
D
C
1
(A)
6
AGO 5671A
7
ea
1
1
1
ea
1
1
1
ea
ea
1
1
1
1
12
12, 23
ea
1
1
1
DS1 (Signal)
DS15 (Alarm)
DS2, DS3,
DS4
(Signal) (Early)
(Late)
DS2 (Power)
DS1 (Power)
DS5 (Power)
K1
(A)
S
O
U
R
C
E
C
D
P
P
P
P
(1)
(B)
M
A
I
N
T
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
UN
PK
QTY
INC
IN
UNIT
QTY
INC
IN
QTY.
AUTH
ILLUSTRATIONS
(C)
R
E
C
(2)
(3)
MODEL
D
C
C
O
D
E
FEDERAL
STOCK
NUMBER
C
R 6625-893-1726
C
6625-061-2040
C
6625-061-2041
C
5995-086-7300
C
5995-889-0872
C
5995-889-0866
C
C
C
C
5910-889-4363
5910-865-3009
5910-060-6708
6625-893-1733
DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
4
5
(A)
(B)
FIG.
NO.
ITEM OR
SYMBOL
NO.
6
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN/CGM-2: 80058 (This item
nonexpendable.)
TECHNICAL MANUAL TM 11-6625-422-12
Requisition through pinpoint account number if
assigned; otherwise through nearest Adjutant General
facilities.
NOTE: For technical manuals the quantity indicates
the maximum number of copies authorized for packing
(or issue) with the equipment. Where a number of
these equipments are concentrated in a small area,
the quantity on hand may be reduced to practical
levels. Excess publications must be returned to
publication supply central through AG channels.
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL PURPOSE ELECTRICAL:
CX-8411/GGM; 80058 (This item is nonexpendable.)
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL PURPOSE, ELECTRICAL:
CX-8412/GGM; 80058 (This item is nonexpendable.)
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL PURPOSE, ELECTRICAL:
CX-8413/GGM; 80058 (This item is nonexpendable.)
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL PURPOSE, ELECTRICAL:
CX-8414/GGM-2; 80058 (This item is nonexpendable. )
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL PURPOSE, EIECTRICAL:
CX-8415/GGM-2; 80058 (This item is nonexpendable.)
CAPACITOR, FIXED), ELECTROLYTIC: 82376; Errl2251
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 00656; AFH3-29-95
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTEOLYTIC: 82376; EYT1220
CART, TELETYPEWRITER TEST SET: 96238; D10010 (This
item is nonexpendable.)
ea
2
ea
1
ea
1
1
ea
1
1
ea
1
1
ea
1
1
ea
1
1
ea
ea
ea
ea
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
7
7
2
C31
C29
C30
AGO 5671A
8
(A)
S
O
U
R
C
E
(1)
(B)
M
A
I
N
T
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
UN
PK
QTY
INC
IN
UNIT
QTY
INC
IN
QTY.
AUTH
ILLUSTRATIONS
(C)
R
E
C
C
O
D
E
(2)
(3)
MODEL
FEDERAL
STOCK
NUMBER
C
D
D
C
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
5960-503-4880
5960-262-3763
5960-272-8553
5960-681-9802
5960-715-3894
5960-669-8921
5960-262-0210
5960-669-6838
5960-855-2875
P
P
P
C
C
C
P
P
P
P
DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
4
5
(A)
(B)
FIG.
NO.
ITEM OR
SYMBOL
NO.
6
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea
1
3
1
1
2
2
2
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
38
38
38
38
V17
V16,V18,V19
V15
V9
38
38
38
38
V6, VII
V5, V10
VI,V2,V4,V7
V14
5920-296-0451
5920-280-5031
5920-280-4465
AN/GGM-2 (continued)
ELECTRON TUBE: 81349; OA2WA
ELECTRON TUBE: 81349; OB2WA
ELECTRON TUBE: 80131; 1X2B
ELECTRON TUBE: 81349; 6AU6WB
ELECTRON TUBE: 73445; 6DJ8
ELECTRON TUBE: 80131; 12BH7A
ELECTRON TUBE: 81349; 5814A
ELECTRON TUBE: 81349; 5963
ELECTRON TUBES, MATCHED: C/o 1 each GV3A, 1 each
GV6A; 96238; A6473
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 81349; F02A250V1-8A
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 81349; F02GR250A
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 81349; F02A250V1AS
ea
ea
ea
9
1
3
5920-284-6785
5920-060-2424
6240-020-5730
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 81349; F02D2ROOB
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 81349; F02A25OV5AS
LAMP, CARTRIDGE: 96238; 9520
ea
ea
ea
1
2
13
16
8
16
F1
F1
10
29
34
F1
F3
F3
C
C
C
10
5
10
13
8
5
3
4
C
6240-887-4770
LAMP, CARTRIDGE: Marked Var; 96238; B9520/VAR
ea
1
1
34
thru F4
F1
F3, F4
DS-1 thru
DS-7,
DS-PO thru
DS-14
DS-8 (Var)
AGO 5671A
9
(A)
S
O
U
R
C
E
(1)
(B)
M
A
I
N
T
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
UN
PK
QTY
INC
IN
UNIT
QTY
INC
IN
QTY.
AUTH
ILLUSTRATIONS
(C)
R
E
C
C
O
D
E
(2)
(3)
MODEL
FEDERAL
STOCK
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
4
5
(A)
(B)
FIG.
NO.
ITEM OR
SYMBOL
NO.
C
D
D
C
6
P
C
6240-892-4420
AN/GGM-2 (continued)
LAMP, GLOW: 08806; NE2D
ea
5
1
27
34
26
P
C
6240-722-6467
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: 80063; SM-B-369238
ea
2
1
27
P
C
6240-683-0560
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: 08806; 345
ea
1
1
3
DS-5 (Power)
P
C
5945-542-7058
RELAY, ARMATURE: 8 pin; 80063; SM-D-349110-3
ea
1
1
12
K1
P
C
5945-088-1621
RELAY, ARMATURE: 11 pin; 04773; 202PTW (NOTE: Can
be requisitioned if required; see pages 19, 23, 36 of
TM 11-6625-422-12.)
ea
*
12, 23
DS1 (Signal)
DS15 (Alarm)
DS2, DS3,
DS4
(Signal) (Early)
(Late)
DS2 (Power)
DS1 (Power)
NO ACCESSORIES, TOOLS OR TEST EQUIPMENT ARE TO BE
ISSUED WITH THIS EQUIPMENT
NO BASIC ISSUE ITEMS ARE MOUNTED IN OR ON THIS
EQUIPMENT
AGO 5671A
10
SECTION IV. BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST (AN/GGM-3)
(A)
S
O
U
R
C
E
(1)
(B)
M
A
I
N
T
C
D
D
C
C
R
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
UN
PK
QTY
INC
IN
UNIT
QTY
INC
IN
QTY.
AUTH
ILLUSTRATIONS
(C)
R
E
C
C
O
D
E
(2)
(3)
MODEL
FEDERAL
STOCK
NUMBER
6625-893-1727
C
6625-061-2040
C
6625-061-2041
C
5995-086-7300
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
5910-889-4363
5910-865-3009
5910-060-6708
5960-503-4880
5960-262-3763
5960-272-8553
5960-681-9802
5960-715-3894
DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
4
5
(A)
(B)
FIG.
NO.
ITEM OR
SYMBOL
NO.
6
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN/G9G-3: 80058 (This item
is nonexpendable.)
TECHNICAL MANUAL TM 11-6625-422-12
Requisition through pinpoint account number if
assigned; otherwise through nearest Adjutant General
facilities.
NOTE: For technical manuals the quantity indicated
the maximum number of copies authorized for packing
(or issue) with the equipment. Where a number of
these equipments are concentrated in a small area, the
quantity on hand may be reduced to practical levels.
Excess publications must be returned to publication
supply central through AG channels.
CABLE ASSEMBLY SPECIAL PURPOSE ELECTRICAL:
CX-8411/GGCK 80058 (This item is nonexpendable.)
CABLE ASSEMBLY SPECIAL FRPOSE ELECTRICAL:
CX-8412/GGM 80058 (This item is nonexpendable. )
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL PURPOSE ELECTRICAL:
CX-8413/GGM 80058 (This item is nonexpendable.)
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 82376; EYT12251
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 00656; AFH3-29-95
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 82376; EYT1220
ELECTRON TUBE: 81349; OA2WA
ELECTRON TUBE: 81349; OB2WA
ELECTRON TUBE: 80131; 1X2B
ELECTRON TUBE: 81349; 6AU6WB
ELECTRON TUBE: 73445; 6DJ8
ea
1
ea
1
ea
1
1
ea
1
1
ea
1
1
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
7
7
7
38
38
38
38
38
C31
C29
C30
V17
V16,V18,V19
V15
V9
V3, V8
AGO 5671A
11
(A)
S
O
U
R
C
E
(1)
(B)
M
A
I
N
T
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
UN
PK
QTY
INC
IN
UNIT
QTY
INC
IN
QTY.
AUTH
ILLUSTRATIONS
(C)
R
E
C
C
O
D
E
(2)
(3)
MODEL
FEDERAL
STOCK
NUMBER
C
D
D
C
P
P
P
P
C
C
C
C
5960-669-8921
5960-262-0210
5960-669-6838
5960-855-2875
P
C
P
P
P
P
DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
4
5
(A)
(B)
FIG.
NO.
ITEM OR
SYMBOL
NO.
6
ea
ea
ea
ea
2
2
4
1
1
1
2
1
38
38
38
38
V6, V11
V5, V10
V1, V2, V4, V7
V14
5920-296-0451
AN/GGM-3 (continued)
ELECTRON TUBE: 80131; 12BH7A
ELECTRON TUBE: 81349; 5814A
ELECTRON TUBE: 81349; 5963
ELECTRON TUBES, MATCHED: C/o 1 each GV3A, 1 each
GV6A; 96283; A6473
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 81349; FO2A250Vi-8A
ea
8
10
C
C
5920-280-5031
5920-280-4465
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 81349; FO2GR250A
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 81349; F02A250VlAS
ea
ea
1
2
5
5
C
C
C
5920-284-6785
5920-060-2424
R 6625-893-1730
ea
ea
ea
1
2
1
5
5
1
F1, F2, F4
F1, F2
F2, F4
F1
F3
F3
F1
F1
F3, F4
C
R 6625-893-1731
*
3, 11
P
C
6620-892-4420
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 81349; FO2D2ROOB
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 81349; F02A250V5AS
GENERATOR, TEST PATTERN SG-431/GGC: 80058 (Installed
in equipment.)
GENERATOR TIME BASE SG-430(P)/GGM: 80058 (NOTE: Can
be requisitioned if required see page 23 of
TM 11-6625-422-12.)
LAMP, GLOW: 08806; NE2D
16
29
8
23
8
16
8
10
29
3
ea
3
1
27
26
P
C
6240-722-6467
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: 80063; SM-B-369238
ea
2
1
P
C
6240-683-0560
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: 08806; 345
ea
1
1
27
26
33
ea
DS-1 (Signal)
DS-2, DS-3,
DS-4
(Signal) (Early)
(Late)
DS-2 (Power)
DS-1 (Power)
DS-5 (Power)
AGO 5671A
12
(A)
S
O
U
R
C
E
C
D
P
P
(1)
(B)
M
A
I
N
T
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
UN
PK
QTY
INC
IN
UNIT
QTY
INC
IN
QTY.
AUTH
ILLUSTRATIONS
(C)
R
E
C
(2)
(3)
MODEL
D
C
C
O
D
E
FEDERAL
STOCK
NUMBER
C
R 6625-893-1732
C
R 6625-893-1734
C
6625-573-3875
C
6625-573-3872
C
C
5945-542-7058
5945-088-1621
C
R 6625-893-1729
DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
4
5
(A)
(B)
FIG.
NO.
ITEM OR
SYMBOL
NO.
6
AN/GGM-3 (continued)
OSCILLOSCOPE OS-119/G2GM: 80058 (Installed in
equipment.)
POWER SUPPLY PP-2971/GGM: 80058 (Installed in
equipment.) (This item is nonexpendable.)
RACK, SHELF ADAPTER: 96238; RS-1A/DAC-V (Installed in
equipment.) (This item is nonexpendable.)
RACK, SHELF ADAPTER: 96238; RS-2B/DAC-V (Installed in
equipment.) (This item is nonexpendable.)
RELAY, ARMATURE: 8 pin; 80063; SM-D-349110-3
RELAY, ARMATURE: 11 pin; 04773; 202PTW (NOTE: Can be
requisitioned if required; see pages 19, 23, 36 of
TM 11-6625-422-12.)
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER TS-1512/GGM: 80058 (Installed
in equipment.)
NO ACCESSORIES, TOOLS OR TEST EQUIPMENT ARE TO BE
ISSUED WITH THIS EQUIPMENT
NO BASIC ISSUE ITEMS ARE MOUNTED IN OR ON THIS
EQUIPMENT
ea
1
1
3
ea
1
1
3
ea
1
1
3
ea
1
1
3
ea
ea
1
1
*
23
12, 23
ea
1
1
3
K1
AGO 5671A
13
(A)
S
O
U
R
C
E
C
D
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
P
(1)
(B)
M
A
I
N
T
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
UN
PK
QTY
INC
IN
UNIT
QTY
INC
IN
QTY.
AUTH
ILLUSTRATIONS
(C)
R
E
C
(2)
(3)
MODEL
D
C
C
O
D
E
FEDERAL
STOCK
NUMBER
C
R 6625-893-1728
C
6625-061-2040
C
6625-061-2041
C
5995-086-'7300
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
5910-889-4363
5910-865-3009
5910-050-6708
5960-503-4880
5960-262-3763
5960-272-8553
5960-681-9802
5960-715-3894
DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
4
5
(A)
(B)
FIG.
NO.
ITEM OR
SYMBOL
NO.
6
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN/GCM-4: 80058 (This item
is nonexpendable. )
TECHNICAL MANUAL TM 11-6625-422-12
Requisition through pinpoint accou
nt number if
assigned; otherwise through nearest Adjutant General
facilities.
NOTE: For technical manuals the quantity indicates
the maximum number of copies authorized for packing
(or issue) with the equipment. Where a number of
these equipments are concentrated in a mall are.,
the quantity on hand may be reduced t0 practical 11,vels
Excess publications must be returned to publication
supply central through AG channels.
CABLE ASSEMBLY SPECIAL PURPOSE ELECTRICAL CX-8411/GGM:
80058; (This item is nonexpendable.)
CABLE ASSEMBLY SPECIAL PURPOSE ELECTRICAL CX-8412/GGM:
80058 (This item is nonexpendable.)
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL PURPOSE ELECTRICAL CX-8413/GGM:
80058 (This item is nonexpendable.)
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 82376; EYT12251
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 00656; AFH3-29-95
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 82376; EYT1220
ELECTRON TUBE: 81349; OA2WA
ELECTRON TUBE: 81349; OB2WA
ELECTRON TUBE: 80131; 1X2B
ELECTRON TUBE: 81349; 6AU6WB
ELECTRON TUBE: 73445; 6DJ8
ea
1
4
ea
1
1
ea
1
1
ea
1
1
ea
1
1
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
7
7
38
38
38
38
38
C31
C29
C30
V17
V16,V18,V19
V15
V9
V3, V8
AGO 5671A
14
(A)
S
O
U
R
C
E
(1)
(B)
M
A
I
N
T
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
UN
PK
QTY
INC
IN
UNIT
QTY
INC
IN
QTY.
AUTH
ILLUSTRATIONS
(C)
R
E
C
C
O
D
E
(2)
(3)
MODEL
FEDERAL
STOCK
NUMBER
C
D
D
C
P
P
P
P
C
C
C
C
5960-669-8921
5960-262-0210
5960-669-6838
5960-855-2875
P
C
5920-296-0451
P
P
P
P
C
C
C
C
C
5920-280-5031
5920-280-4465
5920-284-6785
5920-060-2424
R 6625-893-1731
P
C
6620-892-4420
P
P
C
C
C
C
6240-722-6467
6240-683-0560
R 6625-893-1732
R 6625-893-1734
DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
4
5
(A)
(B)
FIG.
NO.
ITEM OR
SYMBOL
NO.
6
AS/GGM-4 (continued)
ELECTRON TUBE: 80131; 12BH7A
ELECTRON TUBE: 81349; 5814A
ELECTRON TUBE: 81349; 5963
ELECTRON TUBES, HATCHED: C/O 1 each GV3A, 1 each GV6A,
96238; A6473
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 81349; F02A250V1-8A
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 81349; F02GR250A
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 81349; F02A250V1AS
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 81349; F02D2ROOB
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 81349; F02A250V5AS
GENERATOR TIME BASE SG-430(P)/G(GGM: 80058 (NOTE: Can be
requisitioned if required see page 23 of
TM 11-6625-422-12.)
LAMP, GLOW: 08806; NE2D
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: 80063; SM-B-369238
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: 08806; 345
OSCILLOSCOPE OS-119/GGM: 80058 (Installed in equipment)
POWER SUPPLY PP-2971/GGKC: 80058 (Installed in
equipment.)
ea
ea
ea
ea
2
2
4
1
1
1
2
1
38
38
38
38
V6, V11
V5, V10
V1,V2,V4,V7
V14
ea
4
10
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea
1
1
1
2
5
5
5
5
*
29
8
8
8
10
29
3, 11
F1, F2
F2, F4
P3
F1
F1
F3, F4
ea
3
1
27
26
ea
ea
ea
ea
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
26
33
4
4
DS-1 (Signal)
DS-2, DS-3,
DS-4
(Signal) (Early)
DS-1 (Power)
DS-5 (Power)
AGO 5671A
15
(A)
S
O
U
R
C
E
C
D
P
P
(1)
(B)
M
A
I
N
T
D
C
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
UN
PK
QTY
INC
IN
UNIT
QTY
INC
IN
QTY.
AUTH
ILLUSTRATIONS
(C)
R
E
C
C
O
D
E
(2)
(3)
MODEL
FEDERAL
STOCK
NUMBER
C
6625-573-3875
C
C
5945-542-7058
5945-088-1621
C
R 6625-893-1729
DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
4
5
(A)
(B)
FIG.
NO.
ITEM OR
SYMBOL
NO.
6
AN/GGM-4 (continued)
RACK, SHELF ADAPTER: 96238; RS-1A/DAC-V (Installed in
equipment. )
RELAY, PR]5TIJRE: 8 pin; 80063; SM-D-349L10-3
RELAY, ARMATURE: 11 pin; 04773; 202PTW .(NOTE: Can be
requisitioned if required; see pages 19, 23, 36 of
TM 11-6625-422-12.)
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER TS-1512/GGM: 80058 (Installed
in equipment. )
NO ACCESSORIES, TOOLS OR TEST EQUIPMENT ARE TO BE
ISSUED WITH THIS EQUIPMENT
NO BASIC ISSUE ITEMS ARE MOUNTED IN OR ON THIS
EQUIPMENT
ea
1
1
23
ea
ea
1
1
*
23
12, 23
ea
1
1
4
K1
AGO 5671A
16
(A)
S
O
U
R
C
E
C
D
(1)
(B)
M
A
I
N
T
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
UN
PK
QTY
INC
IN
UNIT
QTY
INC
IN
QTY.
AUTH
ILLUSTRATIONS
(C)
R
E
C
(2)
(3)
MODEL
D
C
C
O
D
E
FEDERAL
STOCK
NUMBER
C
R 6625-893-1735
C
6625-061-2040
C
6625-061-2041
C
5995-086-7300
P
P
P
P
C
C
C
C
C
5920-296-0451
5920-280-5031
5920-280-4465
5920-060-2424
R 6625-893-1731
P
C
6620-892-4420
DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
4
5
(A)
(B)
FIG.
NO.
ITEM OR
SYMBOL
NO.
6
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN/GGM-5: 80058 (This item is
nonexpendable.)
TECHNICAL MAIUAL TM 11-6625-422-12
Requisition through pinpoint account number if
assigned; otherwise through nearest Adjutant General
facilities.
NOTE: For technical manuals the quantity indicates
the maximum number of copies authorized for packing
(or issue) with the equipment. Where a number of
these equipments are concentrated in a small area, the
quantity on hand may be reduced to practical levels.
Excess publications must be returned to publication
supply central through AG channels.
CABLE ASSEMBLY SPECIAL PURPOSE ELECTRICAL CX-8411/GGM:
80058 (This item is nonexpendable.)
CABLE ASSEMBLY SPECIAL PURPOSE ELECTRICAL CX-8412/GGM:
80058 (This item is nonexpendable.)
CABLE ASSEMBLY SPECIAL PURPOSE ELECTRICAL CX-8413/GGC:
80058 (This item is nonexpendable.)
EUSE, CARTRIDGE: 81349; F02A250V1-8A
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 81349; F02GR250A
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 81349; FO2A250VIAS
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 81349; FOZA25OV5AS
GENERATOR TIME BASE SG-430(P)/GGM: 80058 (NOTE: Can be
requisitioned if required see page 23 of
TM 11-6625-422-12.)
LAMP, GLOW: 08806; NE2D
ea
1
ea
1
5
ea
1
1
ea
1
1
ea
1
1
ea
ea
ea
ea
ea
6
2
2
2
10
5
5
5
*
8
8
29
3, 11
ea
6
2
26
Fl, F2, F4
F3
F1
F3, F4
DS-2,DS-3,DS-4
(Signal) (Early)
(Late)
AGO 5671A
17
(A)
S
O
U
R
C
E
(1)
(B)
M
A
I
N
T
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST
R
E
C
(2)
(3)
MODEL
C
D
D
C
C
O
D
E
P
C
C
6240-722-6467
R 6625-893-1734
C
6625-573-3873
C
C
5945-542-7058
5945-088-1621
C
R 6625-893-1729
P
P
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
UN
PK
QTY
INC
IN
UNIT
QTY
INC
IN
QTY.
AUTH
ILLUSTRATIONS
(C)
FEDERAL
STOCK
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
1
2
3
4
5
(A)
(B)
FIG.
NO.
ITEM OR
SYMBOL
NO.
6
AN/GGM-5 (continued)
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: 80063; SM-B-369238
POWER SUPPLY PP-2971/GGM: 80058 (Installed in
equipment.)
RACK, SHELF ADAPTER: 96238; RS-1B/DAC-V (This item
is nonexpendable.)
REIAY, ARMATURE: 8 pin; 80063; SM-D-349110-3
RELAY, ARMATURE: 11 pin; 04773; 202PTW (NOTE: Can
be requisitioned if required; see pages 19, 23, 36 of
TM 11-6625-422-12.)
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER TS-1512/GGM: 80058 (Installed
in equipment.)
NO ACCESSORIES, TOOLS OR TEST EQUIPMENT ARE TO BE
ISSUED WITH THIS EQUIPMENT
NO BASIC ISSUE ITEMS ARE MOUNTED IN OR ON THIS
EQUIPMENT
ea
ea
2
1
1
1
DS-1 (Power)
ea
1
1
ea
ea
1
1
*
23
12, 23
ea
2
2
5
17
K1
AGO 5671A
18
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
Official:
KENNETH G. WICKHAM,
Major General, United States Army,
The Adjutant General.
Distribution:
Active Army:
USASA (2)
CNGB (1)
CC-E (7)
Dir of Trans (1)
CofEngrs (1)
TSG (1)
CofSptsS (1)
USACDCEA (1)
USACDCCBRA (1)
USACDCCEA (1)
USACDCOA (1)
USACDCQMA (1)
USACDCTA (1)
USACDCADA (1)
USACDCARMA (1)
USACDCAVNA (1)
USACDCARTYA (1)
USACDCSWA (1)
USACDCCEA (Ft Huachuca) (1)
USAARENED (2)
USAMC (5)
USCONARC (5)
ARADCOM (5)
ARADCOM Rgn (2)
OS Maj Comd (4)
LOGCOMD (2)
USAMICOM (4)
USASTRATCOM (4)
USAESC (70)
MDW (1)
Armies (2)
Corps (2)
USAC (8)
Svc Colleges (2)
USASESCS (5)
USAADS (2)
USAAMS (2)
USAARMS (2)
USAIS (2)
USAES (2)
USATC (2)
WRAMC (1)
NG: None.
USAR: None.
For explanation of abbreviations used, see AR 320-50.
HAROLD K. JOHNSON,
General, United States Army,
Chief of Staff.
Army Pic Cen (2)
USACDCEC (10)
Gen Dep (2)
Sig Sec, Gen Dep (5)
Sig Dep (12)
Army Dep (2) except
LBAD (14)
SAAD (80)
TOAD (14)
LEAD (7)
SHAD (3)
NAAD (5)
SVAD (5)
CHAD (8)
ATAD (10)
Instl (3) except
Ft Hancock (4)
Ft Gordon (10)
Ft Huachuca (10)
Ft Carson (25)
Ft Knox (12)
WSMR (5)
Sig Fld Maint Shops (2)
AMS (1)
USAERDAA (2)
USAERDAW (13)
USACRREL (2)
MAAG (2)
USARMIS (2)
Units org under fol TOE (2 ea):
11-57
11-97
11-98
11-117
11-127
11-155
11-157
11-827
11-500 (AA-AC)
11-87
11-592
11-597
TM 11-6625-422-12
*C 6
Changes in force: C 1, C 2, C 3, C 4, C 5, and C 6
CHANGE
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
No. 6
WASHINGTON, D.C., 3 March 1966
Organizational Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tool Lists
TEST SETS, TELETYPEWRITER AN/GGM-1, AN/GGM-2, AN/GGM3, AN/GGM-4,
AND AN /GGM-5
TM 11-6625-422-12, 6 October 1961, is changed as follows:
Page 39, figure 26 (page 4 of C 5). Make the
following changes:
Change the word NOTE to NOTES.
Number the existing note: 1.
Add the following:
NOTE 2
ON
DIGITAL
DISTORTION
ANALYZERS MODIFIED BY MWO 11625-422-20/1, THE BAUDS SWITCH
HAS 12 POSITIONS: VAR AND 1
THROUGH 11.
FREQUENCIES
CORRESPONDING TO THE BAUDS
SWITCH MARKINGS ARE WRITTEN
ON A DECAL AT THE RIGHT SIDE OF
THE PANEL.
Page 41, figure 27 (page 4 of C 5). Make the
following changes:
Change the word NOTE to NOTES.
Number the existing note: 1.
Add the following:
NOTE 2
ON TEST PATTERN DISTORTION
GENERATORS MODIFIED BY MWO
11625-422-20/1,
THE
BAUDS
SWITCH HAS 12 POSITIONS: VAR
AND 1 THROUGH 11.
Page 54, paragraph 35, chart, "Control,
Indicator, or Jack" column. After BAUDS switch, add
(digital distortion analyzers modified by MWO 11-6625422-20/1 have 12 positions).
Page 56, paragraph 37, chart, "Function"
column. Make the following changes:
Line 2. Change "on" to: by.
Line 4, add: For time base generators modified
by MWO 11-6625-422-20/1, clear lamps are used and
the baud rates are written on a decal beside the lamps
(fig. 34.1).
Note
The parenthetical reference to
previous changes (example: page 1
of C 3) indicates that pertinent
material was published in that
change.
The title is changed as shown above.
Add "NOTE.
EQUIPMENT MODIFIED BY
MWO 11-6625422-20/1 HAVE OUTPUT TIMING
COAXIAL CONNECTORS MARKED BY NUMBERS
CORRESPONDING TO BAUD RATE." in the following
places:
Page 33, figure 21.
Page 34, figure 22.
Page 36, figure 23.
Page 37, figure 24.
Page 38, figure 25.
Page 3, paragraph 2 (page 1 of C 5). Delete
subparagraph c and substitute:
c. Reporting of Equipment Manual Improvements.
The direct reporting of errors, omissions, and
recommendations for improving this manual by the
individual user, is authorized and encouraged. DA Form
2028 (Recommended Changes to DA Publication) will
be used for reporting these improvements. This form
will be completed using pencil, pen, or typewriter and
forwarded direct to Commanding General, U.S. Army
Electronics Command, ATTN: AMSEL-MYR (NMP)-MA,
Fort Monmouth, N.J., 07703.
Page 23, paragraph 15 (page 4 of C 5). After
subparagraph b(3), add subparagraph c:
c. Time base.
generators modified by MWO
116625-422-20/1 have clear lamps marked by decals
corresponding to the numbers beside the printed circuit
cards inside the time base generator.
Note
MWO 11-662422-20/1 changes the
type number of the SG-430/GGM to
SG--430(P)/GGM.
*This change supersedes TM 11-6625-422-2OP, 15 February 1963, including C 1, 26 December 1963.
1
Page 58, figure 34 (page 4 of C 5). After figure 34, add figure 341.
Figure 34.1. Time base generator modified by MWO 11-645-420/1, front panel.
2
Delete appendix II (added by C 2, 10 Jan. 63 and changed by page 5 of C 4) and substitute:
APPENDIX II
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST
Section I. INTRODUCTION
1. General
d. Unit of Issue. The unit of issue is each unless
otherwise indicated and is the supply term by which the
individual item' is counted for procurement, storage,
requisitioning, allowances, and issue purposes.
e. Expandability.
Nonexpendable items are
indicated by NX. Expendable items are not annotated.
f. Quantity Authorized. Under "Items Comprising
and Operable Equipment," this column lists the quantity
of items supplied for the initial operation of the
equipment. Under "Running Spare Items" the quantities
listed are those issued initially with the equipment as
spare parts. The quantities are authorized to be kept on
hand by the operator for maintenance of the equipment.
g. Illustration. The "Item No." column lists the
reference designations that appear on the part in the
equipment. These same designations are also used on
any illustrations of the equipment. The numbers in the
"Figure No." column refer to the illustrations where the
part is shown.
a. This appendix lists items supplied for initial
operation and for running spares. The list includes
tools, parts, and material issued as part of the major end
item. The list includes all items authorized for basic
operator maintenance of the equipment. End items of
equipment are issued on the basis of allowances
prescribed in equipment authorization tables and other
documents that are a basis for requisitioning.
2. Columns
Columns are as follows:
a. Federal Stock Number. This column lists the
11-digit Federal stock number.
b. Designation by Model. Not used.
c. Description. Nomenclature or the standard item
name and brief identifying data for each item are listed
in this column.
When requisitioning, enter the
nomenclature and description.
3
SECTION II. OPERATOR’S FUNCTION PARTS LIST (AN/GGM-1)
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
6625-893-1752
ORD THRU AGC
6625-061-2040
6625-061-2041
5995-086-7300
5955-061-0031
5955-689-8286
5955-061-0032
5955-813-9692
5955-813-9743
5955-813-9693
6625-893-1730
6625-893-1731
5895-887-1804
5895-887-4100
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN/GGM-1
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN/GGM-1: Alignment of start/stop
synchronous -telegraph transmission systems, measures
peak distortion of telegraph signals; mounted in Rack,
Shelf Adapter RS-1A/DAC-V; Rack, Shelf Adapter RS-2A/DAC-V;
oper pwr rqmts; 115 vac, 50/60 cycle, single ph
ITEMS COMPRISING AN OPERABLE EQUIPMENT
TECHNICAL MANUAL TM 11-6625-422-12
NOTE: For technical manuals the quantity indicates the
maximum number of copies authorized for packing (or issue)
with the equipment. Where a number of these equipments are
concentrated in a small area, the quantity on hand may be
reduced to practical levels. Excess publications must be
returned to publication supply centers through AG channels.
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL PURPOSE, ELECTRICAL: CX-8411/GGM
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL PURPOSE, ELECTRICAL: CX-8412/GGM
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL PURPOSE, ELECTRICAL: CX-8413/GGM
CRYSTAL UNIT, QUARTZ: 93.237 KC; MIL type CR-37/U-93.237 KC
(Installed in equipment)
CRYSTAL UNIT, QUARTZ: 102.400 KC; MIL type CR-37/U-102.400 KC
CRYSTAL UNIT, QUARTZ: 115.200 KC; MIL type CR-37/U-115.200 KC
CRYSTAL UNIT, QUARTZ: 125.217 KC; MIL type CR-37/U-125.217 KC
CRYSTAL UNIT, QUARTZ: 152.016 KC; MIL type CR-37/U-152.016 KC
CRYSTAL UNIT QUARTZ: 153.600 KC; MIL type CR-37/U-153.600 KC
(Installed in equip)
GENERATOR, TEST PATTERN SG-431/GGM (Installed in equip)
GENERATOR, TIME BASE SG-430(P)/GGM(Installed in equip)
MODULE, BAUD RATE CONTROL PL-1098/GGM
MODULE, BAUD RATE CONTROL PL-1099/GGM
4
EXP
QTY
AUTH
ILLUSTRATION
FIG. NO.
NX
ITEM NO.
1
1
NX
1
11
1
Y1
NX
NX
NX
NX
NX
1
1
1
1
2
Y1
Y1
Y1
Y1
Y1
NX
NX
NX
NX
1
1
1
1
1
1
12
12
(37.5)
(45.5)
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
5910-889-4363
5910-865-3009I
5910-060-6708
5960-503-4880
5960-166-7648
AN/GGM-1 (continued)
MODULE, BAUD RATE CONTROL PL-1100/GGM
MODULE, BAUD RATE CONTROL PL-11O1/GGM
MODULE, BAUD RATE CONTROL PL-1102/GGM
MODULE, BAUD RATE CONTROL PL-1103/GGM
MODULE, BAUD RATE CONTROL PL-1106/GGM
OSCILLOSCOPE OS-119/GGM (Installed in equip)
POWER SUPPLY PP-2971/GGM
RACK, SHELF ADAPTER: Stelma p/n RS-1A/DAC-V (Installed in equip)
RACK, SHELF ADAPTER: Stelma p/n RS-2A/DAC-V (Installed in equip)
RELAY, ARMATURE: Sigma p/n 72AOZ16OTS-TCP
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER TS-1512/GGM(Installed in equip)
RUNNING SPARE ITEMS
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 40-40-80 uf, 350 V; Astron p/n EYT12251
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 40-40-120 uf, 35 V; Aerovox p/n AFH3-29-95
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 40-40-120 uf, 350 V; Astron p/n EYT1220
ELECTRON TUBE: type OA2WA; MIL-E-1
ELECTRON TUBE: type OB2; MIL-E-1
5960-272-8553
ELECTRON TUBE: type 1X2B; MIL-E-1
5895-887-4103
5895-887-4104
5895-887-1806
5895-887-1807
5985-887-4101
6625-893-1732
6625-893-1734
6625-573-3875
6625-573-3871
5945-615-1457
6625-893-1729
5
EXP
QTY
AUTH
ILLUSTRATION
FIG. NO.
NX
NX
NX
NX i
NX
NX
NX
NX
NX
I NX
ITEM NO.
1
1
1
1
i
1
1
1
1
1
1
12
12
12
12.
12
1
1
1
1
23
1
(61.14)
(74.2)
(112.5)
(150)
(50 )
1
1
1
1
1
7
7
7
38
38
1
38
C31
C29
C30
V17
V16,18,
19
V15
K1
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
EXP
QTY
AUTH
ILLUSTRATION
FIG. NO.
ITEM NO.
AN/GGM-1 (continued)
5960-681-9802
5960-715-3894
5960-669-8921
5960-262-0210
5960-669-6838
ELECTRON TUBE: type 6AU6WB; MIL-E-1
ELECTRON TUBE: type 6DJ8; MIL-E-1
ELECTRON TUBE: type 12BH7A; MIL-E-1
ELECTRON TUBE: type 5814A; MIL-E-1
ELECTRON TUBE: type 5963; MIL-E-1
1
1
1
1
2
38
38
38
38
38
5960-855-2875
ELECTRON TUBE: Matched; c/o 1 each GV3A, 1 each GV6A;
Stelma p/n A6473
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1/8 amp, 250 v; MIL type F02GR125A
1
38
V9
V3,8
V6,11
V5,10
V1,2,4,
7
V14
10
16
F1,2,4
5920-356-2188
5920-280-5031
5920-280-4465
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1/4 amp, 250 v; MIL type F02GR250A
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1 amp, 250 v; MIL type F2G1ROOA
5
10
5920-284-6785
5920-295-7787
6240-683-0580
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: Slo-Blow; 2 amp, 125 v; MIL type FO2D2ROOB
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 5 amp, 250 v; MIL type F02G5ROOA
LAMP, GLOW: G. E. type no. NE2D
5
5
1
13
29
8
8
16
13
8
10
29
27
34
26
6240-722-6467
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: G. E. type no. 344
1
6
27
F2,3
F1,2
F2,4
F3
F3
F1
F1
Fl
F3,4
DS1
(signal)
DS15
DS2,3,4
(signal)
(early)
(late)
DS2
(power)
26 DS1
(power)
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
EXP
QTY
AUTH
ILLUSTRATION
FIG. NO.
6240-683-0560
AN/GGM-1 (continued)
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: G. E. p/n 345
1
33
6240-020-5730
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: Stelma p/n B9526X
4
34
6240-887-4770
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: marked var; Stelma p/n B9520/VAR
1
34
5945-615-1457
RELAY, ARMATURE: Sigma p/n 72AOZ160TS-TCP
1
7
ITEM NO.
DS-5
(power)
DS-1
thru
DS-7,
DS-10
thru
DS-14
DS-8
K1
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
EXP
QTY
AUTH
FIG. NO.
ORD THRU AGC
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN/GGM-2
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN/GGM-2: Alignment of start/stop and
synchronous telegraph systems measures peak distortion of
telegraph signals; mounted in Equipment Housing EH-1/DAC-V;
oper pwr rqmts; 115 vac, 50/60 cyc, single ph
ITEMS COMPRISING AN OPERABLE EQUIPMENT
TECHNICAL MANUAL TM 11-6625-422-12
NOTE: For technical manuals the quantity indicates the
maximum number of copies authorized for packing (or issue) with
the equipment. Where a number of these equipments are
concentrated in a small area, the quantity on hand may be
reduced to practical levels. Excess publications must be
returned to publication supply centers through AG channels.
6625-061-2040
6625-061-2041
5995-086-7300
5995-889-0872
5995-889-o866
6625-893-1733
5955-061-0031
5955-689-8286
5955-061-0032
5955-813-9692
5955-813-9743
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL PURPOSE, ELECTRICAL: CX-8411/GGM
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL PURPOSE, ELECTRICAL: CX-8412/GGM
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL PURPOSE, ELECTRICAL: CX-8413/GGM
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL PURPOSE, ELECTRICAL: CX-8414/GGM-2
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL PURPOSE, ELECTRICAL: CX-8415/GGM-2
CART, TELETYPEWRITER TEST SET: Stelman p/n D10010
CRYSTAL UNIT, QUARTZ: 93.237 KC; MIL type CR-37/U-93.237 KC
CRYSTAL UNIT, QUARTZ: 102.400 KC; MIL type CR-37/U-102.400 KC
CRYSTAL UNIT, QUARTZ: 115.200 KC; MIL type CR-37/U-115.200 KC
CRYSTAL UNIT, QUARTZ: 125.217 KC; MIL type CR-37/U-125.217 KC
CRYSTAL UNIT, QUARTZ: 152.016 KC; MIL type CR-37/U-152.016 KC
NX
NX
NX
NX
NX
NX
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5955-813-9693
6625-573-3880
CRYSTAL UNIT, QUARTZ: 153.600 KC; MIL type CR-37/U-153.600 KC
I EQUIPMENT HOUSING: Stelma p/n EH-1/DAC-V
NX
NX
2
1
6625-893-1726
8
ILLUSTRATION
NX
ITEM NO.
2
1
2
Y1
Y1
Y1
Y1
Y1
Y1
2
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
6625-893-1730
6625-893-1731
5895-887-1804
5895-887-4100
5895-887-4103
5895-887-4104
5895-887-1806
5895-887-1807
5985-887-4101
6625-893-1732
6625-893-1734
5945-615-1457
7440-893-1729
5910-889-4363
5910-865-3009
5910-060-6708
5960-503-4880
5960-166-7648
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
AN/GGM-2 (continued)
GENERATOR, TEST PATTERN SG-431/GGM (Installed in equip)
GENERATOR, TIME BASE SG-430 (P) GGM (Installed in equip)
MODULE, BAUD RATE CONTROL PL-1098/GGM
MODULE, BAUD RATE CONTROL PL-1099/GGM
MODULE, BAUD RATE CONTROL PL-1100/GGM
MODULE, BAUD RATE CONTROL PL-1101/GGM
MODULE, BAUD RATE CONTROL PL-1102/GGM
MODULE, BAUD RATE CONTROL PL-1103/GGM
MODULE, BAUD RATE CONTROL PL-1106/GGM
OSCILLOSCOPE OS-119/GGM (Installed in equip)
POWER SUPPLY PP-2971/GGM (Installed in equip)
RELAY, ARMATURE: Sigma p/n 72AOZ16OTS-TCP (Installed in equip)
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER TS-1512/GGM (Installed in equip)
RUNNING SPARE ITEMS
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 40-40-80 uf, 350 v; Astron
p/n EYT12251
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 40-40-120 uf, 35 v; Aerovox p/n
AFH3-29-95
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 40-40-120 uf, 350 v; Astron
p/n EYT1220
ELECTRON TUBE: type OA2WA, MIL-E-1
ELECTRON TUBE: type OB2, MIL-E-1
9
EXP
QTY
AUTH
ILLUSTRATION
FIG. NO.
NX
NX
NX
NX
NX
NX
NX
NX
NX
NX
NX
NX
ITEM NO.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
2
2
23
2
1
7
C31
1
7
C29
1
7
C30
1
1
38
38
V17
V16,18,
(37.5)
(45.5)
(61.14)
1 (74.2)
(112.5)
(150)
(50)
K1
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
EXP
QTY
AUTH
ILLUSTRATION
FIG. NO.
ITEM NO.
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
V15
V9
V3,8
V6,11
V5,10
V1,2,4,7
V14
5920-356-2188
AN/GGM-2 (continued)
ELECTRON TUBE: type 1X2B; MIL-E-1
ELECTRON TUBE: type 6AU6W,B; MIL-E-1
ELECTRON TUBE: type 6DJ8; MIL-E-1
ELECTRON TUBE: type 12BH7A; MIL-E-1
ELECTRON TUBE: type 5814A; MIL-E-1
ELECTRON TUBE: type 5963; MIL-E-1
ELECTRON TUBE: Matched; c/o 1 each GV3A, 1 each GV6A; Stelma
p/n 6473
FUSE CARTRIDGE: 1/8 amp, 250 v; MIL type F02GR125A
10
5920-280-5031
5920-280-4465
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1/4 amp, 250 v; MIL type F02GR250A
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1 amp, 250 v; MIL type F02G1R00A
5
10
5920-284-6785
5920-295-7787
6240-683-0580
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: Slo-Blow; 2 amp, 250 v; MIL type F02D2R00B
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 5 amp, 250 v; MIL type F02G5R00A
LAMP, GLOW: G. E. type no. NE2D
5
5
1
16
13
29
8
8
16
13
8
10
29
27
F1,2,3
F2,3
F1, F2
F2,4
F3
F3
F1
F1
F1
F3,4
DS-1
(signal)
DS-15
DS-2,3,4
(signal)
(early)
(late)
CS-2
(power)
DS-1
(power)
5960-272-8553
5960-681-9802
5960-715-3891
5960-669-8921
5960-262-0210
5960-669-6838
5960-855-2875
34
26
6240-722-6467
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: G. E. type no. 344
1
27
26
10
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
EXP
QTY
AUTH
ILLUSTRATION
FIG. NO.
ITEM NO.
AN/GGM-2 (continued)
6240-683-0560
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: G. E. p/n 345
1
33
DS-5
(power)
6240-020-5730
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: Stelma p/n B9520X
3
34
5240-887-4770
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: marked VAR; Stelma p/n B9520/VAR
1
34
DS-1
thru
DS-7,
DS-9
thru
DS-14
DS-8
5945-615-1457
RELAY, ARMATURE: Sigma p/n 72AOZ160TS-TCP
1
11
K1
SECTION IV. OPERATOR'S FUNCTIONAL PARTS LIST (AN/GGM-3)
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
EXP
QTY
AUTH
ILLUSTRATION
FIG. NO.
ITEM NO.
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN/GGM-3
6625-893-1727
OFD THRU AGC
6625-061-2040
6625-061-2041
5995-086-7300
6625-893-1730
6625-893-1732
6625-893-1734
6625-573-3875
6625-573-3872
5945-615-1457
6625-893-1729
5910-889-4363
5910-865-3009
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN/GGM-3: Measures peak distortion of Telegraph
Signals; provides automatic means of viewing signals; transmits "quick
brown fox" test message; mounted in Rack, Shelf Adapter RS-IA/DAC-V;
Rack, Shelf Adapter RS-2B/DAC-V; oper pwr rqmts; 115 vac, 50/60 cyc,
single ph.
ITEMS COMPRISING AN OPERABLE EQUIPMENT
TECHNICAL MANUAL TM 11-6625-422-12
NOTE: For technical manuals the quantity indicates the maximum number of
copies authorized for packing (or issue) with the equipment. Where a
number of these equipments are concentrated in a small area, the quantity
on hand may be reduced to practical levels. Excess publications must be
returned to publication supply centers through AG channels.
CABLE ASSEMBLY SPECIAL PURPOSE ELECTRICAL CX-8411/GGM
CABLE ASSEMBLY SPECIAL SE ELECTRICAL CX-8412/GGM
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL PURPOSE ELECTRICAL CX-8413/GGM
GENERATOR, TEST PATTERN SG-431/GGM (Installed in equip.)
OSCILLOSCOPE OS-119/GGM (Installed in equip.)
POWER SUPPLY PP-2971/GGM (Installed in equip.)
RACK, SHELF ADAPTER: Stelma part #RS-1A/DAC-V
RACK, SHELF ADAPTER: Stelma part #RS-2B/DAC-V
RELAY, ARMATURE: Sigma part #72A0Z160TS-TCP
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER TS-1512/GGM (Installed in equip.)
RUNNING SPARE ITEMS
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 40-40-80 uf, 350 v; Astron part #EYT12251
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 40-40-120 uf, 35 v; Aerovox part #AFH3-29-95
12
NX
3
1
NX
NX
NX
NX
NX
1
NX
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
23
1
13
3
3
3
3
K1
3
1
1
7
7
C31
C29
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
EXP
QTY
AUTH
ILLUSTRATION
FIG. NO.
ITEM NO.
5910-060-6708
5960-503-4880
5960-166-7648
AN/GGM-3 (continued)
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 40-40-120 uf, 350 v; Astron part #EYT1220
ELECTRON TUBE: type OA2WA; MIL-E-1
ELECTRON TUBE: type OB2; MIL-E-1
1
1
1
7
38
38
5960-272-8553
5960-681-9802
ELECTRON TUBE: type 1X2B; MIL-E-1
ELECTRON TUBE: type 6AU6WB; MIL-E-1
1
1
38
38
C30
V17
V16, V18,
19
V15
V9
5960-715-3894
5960-669-8921
5960-262-0210
ELECTRON TUBE: type 6DJ8; MIL-E-1
ELECTRON TUBE: type 12BH7A; MIL-E-1
ELECTRON TUBE: type 5814A; MIL-E-1
1
1
1
38
38
38
V3, V8
V6, V11
V5, V10
5960-669-6838
ELECTRON TUBE: type 5963; MIL-E-1
2
38
5960-855-2875
5920-356-2188
ELECTRON TUBES: Matched; c/o 1 each GV3A, 1 each GV6A; Stelma part #A6473
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1/8 amp, 250 v; MIL type F02GR125A
1
10
5920-280-5031
5920-280-4465
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1/4 amp, 250 v; MIL type F02GR250A
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1 amp, 250 v; MIL type F02GLR00A
5
5
5920-284-6785
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: Slow-Blo; 2 amp, 125 v; MIL type F02D2R00B
F1
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 5 amp, 250 v; MIL type F02G5R00A
LAMP, GLOW: G. E. type #NE2D
38
16
29
8
23
8
16
8
5
V1, V2,
V4, V7
V14
F1, F2, F4
F1, F2
F2, F4
F1
F3
F3
F1
10
5920-295-7787
6240-892-4420
1
29
27
26
13
F3, F4
DS-1
(SIGNAL)
DS-2 DS-3
DS-4
(SIGNAL)
(EARLY)
(LATE)
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
EXP
QTY
AUTH
ILLUSTRATION
FIG. NO.
ITEM NO.
AN/GGM-3 (continued)
6240-722-6467
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: G. E. type #344
1
27
26
DS-2
(POWER)
DS-1
(POWER)
6240-683-0560
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: G. E. part #345
1
33
DS-5
(POWER)
5945-615-1457
RELAY, ARMATURE: Sigma part #72A0Z16OTS-TCP
1
23
K1
14
SECTION IV. OPERATOR'S FUNCTIONAL PARTS LIST (AN/GGM-3)
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
EXP
QTY
AUTH
ILLUSTRATION
FIG. NO.
ITEM NO.
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN/GGM-4
6625-893-1728
ORD THRU AGC
6625-061-2040
6625-061-2041
5995-086-7300
6625-893-1732
6625-893-1734
6625-573-3875
5945-615-1457
6625-893-1729
5910-889-4363
5910-865-3009
5910-060-6708
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN/GGM-4: measures peak distortion of
telegraph signals, automatic means of viewing telegraph
signals while traffic is being transmitted; mounted in Rack,
Shelf Adapter RS-1A/DAC-V; oper pwr, rqmts; 115 vac, 50/60 cyc,
single ph
ITEMS COMPRISING AN OPERABLE EQUIPMENT
TECHNICAL MANUAL TM 11-6625-422-12
NOTE: For technical manuals the quantity indicates the
maximum number of copies authorized for packing (or issue)
with the equipment. Where a number of these equipments are
concentrated in a small area, the quantity on hand may be
reduced to practical levels. Excess publications must be
returned to publication supply centers through AG channels
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL PURPOSE, ELECTRICAL: CX-8411/GGM
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL PURPOSE, ELECTRICAL: CX-8412/GGM
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL PURPOSE, ELECTRICAL: CX-8413/GGM
OSCILLOSCOPE OS-119/GGM (Installed in equip)
POWER SUPPLY, PP-2971/GGM
RACK, SHELF ADAPTER: Stelma p/n RS-1A/DAC-V
RELAY, ARMATURE: Sigma p/n 72AOZ160TS-TCP
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER TS-1512/GGM (Installed in equip)
RUNNING SPARE ITEMS
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 40-40-80 uf, 350 v; Astron
p/n EYT12251
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 40-40-120 uf, 35 v; Aerovox
p/n AFH3-29-95
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 40-40-120 uf, 350 v; Astron
p/n EYT1220
15
NX
4
1
NX
NX
NX
NX
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
23
14
1
7
C31
1
7
C29
1
7
C30
K1
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
EXP
QTY
AUTH
ILLUSTRATION
FIG. NO.
ITEM NO.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
V17
V16, 18,
V15
V9
V3, V8
V6, 11
V5, V10
V1,2,4
V14
5920-356-2188
AN/GGM-4 (continued)
ELECTRON TUBE: type OA2WA; MIL-E-1
ELECTRON TUBE: type OB2; MIL-E-1
ELECTRON TUBE: type 1X2B; MIL-E-1
ELECTRON TUBE: type 6AU6WB; MIL-E-1
ELECTRON TUBE: type 6DJ8; MIL-E-1
ELECTRON TUBE: type 12BH7A; MIL-E-1
ELECTRON TUBE: type 5814A, MIL-E-1
ELECTRON TUBE: type 5963; MIL-E-1
ELECTRON TUBE: matched; c/o 1 each GV3A, 1 each GV6A; Stelma
p/n A6473
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1/8 amp, 250 v; MIL type F02GR125A
10
5920-280-5031
5920-280-4465
5920-284-6785
5920-295-7789
6240-683-0580
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1/4 amp, 250 v; MIL type F02GR250A
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1 amp, 250 v; MIL type F02G1R00P
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: Slow-Blow; 2 amp, 125 v; MIL type F02D2R00B
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 5 amp, 250 v; MIL type R02G5R00A
LAMP, GLOW: G. E. p/n NE2D
5
5
5
5
1
29
8
8
8
10
29
26
6240-722-6467
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: G. E. p/n 344
1
26
6240-683-0560
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: G. E. p/n 345
1
33
F1 ,2,
F2, 4
F3
F1
F1
F3, 4
DS-2,3,4
(signal)
(early)
(late)
DS-1
(Power)
DS-5
(Power)
5960-503-4880
5960-166-7648
5960-272-8553
5960-681-9802
5960-715-3894
5960-669-8921
5960-262-0210
5960-669-6838
5960-855-2875
16
SECTION IV. OPERATOR'S FUNCTIONAL PARTS LIST (AN/GGM-3)
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
5920-356-2188
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN/GGMTEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN/GGM-5: Measures peak distortion of telegraph
signals; mounted in Rack, Shelf Adapter RS-1B/DAC-V; oper pwr rqmts; 115
vac, 50/60 cyc, single ph.
ITEMS COMPRISING AN OPERABLE EQUIPMENT
TECHNICAL MANUAL TM 11-6625-422-12
NOTE: For technical manuals the quantity indicates the maximum number of
copies authorized for packing (or issue) with the equipment. Where a number
of these equipments are concentrated in a small area, the quantity on hand
may be reduced to practical levels. Excess publications must be returned
to publication supply centers through AG channels.
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL PURPOSE, ELECTRICAL CX-8411/GGM
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL PURPOSE, ELECTRICAL CX-8412/GGM
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL PURPOSE, ELECTRICAL CX-8413/GGM
POWER SUPPLY PP-2971/GGM
RACK, SHELF ADAPTER: Stelma part #RS-1B/DAC-V
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER TS-1512/GGM (Installed in equip.)
RUNNING SPARE ITEMS
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1/8 amp. 250 v; MIL type F02GR125A
5920-280-5031
5920-280-4465
5920-295-7787
6240-683-0580
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1/4 amp, 250 v; MIL type F02GR250A
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1 amp, 250 v; MIL type F02G1R00A
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 5 amp, 250 v; MIL type F02G5R00A
LAMP, GLOW: G. E. type #NE2D
6625-893-1735
ORD THRU AGC
6625-061-2040
6625-061-2041
5995-086-7300
6625-893-1734
6625-573-3873
6625-893-1729
EXP
QTY
AUTH
FIG. NO.
NX
ITEM NO.
5
1
NX
1
1
1
1
1
2
10
5
5
5
2
17
ILLUSTRATION
17
5
5
29
8
8
8
29
26
F1, F2
F2, F4
F3
F1
F3, F4
DS-2, DS-3
DS-4
(SIGNAL)
(EARLY)
(LATE)
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
6240-722-6467
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
AN/GGM-5 (continued)
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: G. E. type #344
EXP
QTY
AUTH
FIG. NO.
1
18
ILLUSTRATION
26
ITEM NO.
DS-1
(POWER)
Delete appendix III (added by C 2, 10 Jan. 63 and changed by pages 5 and 6 of C 4) and substitute:
APPENDIX III
MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION
Section I. INTRODUCTION
replacement of running spare type
items such as fuses, lamps, or
electron tubes.
(g) Align.
To adjust two or more
components of an electrical system
so that their functions are properly
synchronized.
(h) Calibrate. To determine, check, or
rectify the graduation of an
instrument, weapon, or weapons
system, or components of a
weapons system.
(i) Overhaul. To restore an item to
completely serviceable condition as
prescribed
by
serviceability
standards. This is accomplished
through
employment
of
the
technique of "Inspect and Repair
Only as Necessary" (IROAN).
Maximum utilization of diagnostic
and test equipment is combined
with minimum disassembly of the
item during the overhaul process.
(j) Rebuild. To restore an item to a
standard as near as possible to
original or new condition in
appearance, performance, and life
expectancy. This is accomplished
through the maintenance technique
of complete disassembly of the
item, inspection of all parts or
components, repair or replacement
of worn or unserviceable elements
using
original
manufacturing
tolerances and/or specifications,
and subsequent reassembly of the
item.
(3) Operator, organizational, direct support,
general support, and depot. The symbol
X indicates the categories; responsible for
performing that particular maintenance
operation, but does not; necessarily
indicate that repair parts will be stocked at
that level. Categories higher than those
1. General
a. This appendix assigns maintenance functions to
be performed on components, assemblies, and
subassemblies by the lowest appropriate maintenance
category.
b. Columns in the maintenance allocation chart are
as follows:
(1) Part or component. This column shows
only the nomenclature or standard item
name. Additional descriptive data are
included only where clarification is
necessary to identify the component.
Components,
assemblies,
and
subassemblies are listed in top-down
order. That is, the assemblies which are
part of a component are listed
immediately below that component, and
subassemblies which are part of an
assembly are listed immediately below
that assembly.
Each generation
breakdown (components, assemblies, or
subassemblies) are listed in disassembly
order or alphabetical order.
(2) Maintenance function.
This column
indicates the various maintenance
functions allocated to the categories.
(a) Service. To clean, to preserve, and
to replenish lubricants.
(b) Adjust. To regulate periodically to
prevent malfunction.
(c) Inspect. To verify serviceability and
detect
incipient
electrical
or
mechanical failure by scrutiny.
(d) Test. To verify serviceability and to
detect
incipient
electrical
or
mechanical failure by use of special
equipment such as gages, meters,
etc.
(e) Replace. To substitute serviceable
components,
assemblies,
or
subassemblies, for unserviceable
components,
assemblies,
or
subassemblies.
(f) Repair.
To restore an item to
serviceable
condition
through
correction of a specific failure or
unserviceable condition.
This
function includes but is not limited
to welding, grinding, riveting,
straightening, and replacement of
parts other than the trial and error
19
maintenance equipment required to
perform the maintenance functions.
(2) Operator, organizational, direct support,
general support, and depot. The dagger
(f) symbol indicates the categories
normally allocated the facility.
(3) Tool code. This column lists the tool code
assigned.
2. Maintenance by Using Organizations
When this equipment is used by Signal services
organizations organic to theater headquarters or
communication
zones
to
provide
theater
communications, those maintenance functions allocated
up to and including general support are authorized to the
organization operating this equipment.
marked by X are authorized to perform
the indicated operation.
(4) Tools required. This column indicates
codes assigned to each individual tool
equipment,
test
equipment,
and
maintenance equipment referenced. The
grouping of codes in this column of the
maintenance allocation chart indicates the
tool, test, and maintenance equipment
required to perform the maintenance
function.
(5) Remarks. Entries in this column will be
utilized when necessary to clarify any of
the data cited in the preceding columns.
c. Columns in the allocation of tools for
maintenance functions are as follows:
(1) Tools required for maintenance functions.
This column lists tools, test, and
20
Section II. MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART (AN/GGM 1)
PART
OR
COMPONENT
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN/
GGM-1.
MAINTENANCE
FUNCTION
CATEGORY
O/C
Service
Adjust
Inspect-.
Test
O
DS
TOOLS
REQUIRED
GS
X
X
X
X
1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8,
9,10, 12, 13.
1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8,
9,10, 12, 13, 14.
6
2, 6
11
2, 6
.
.
X
X
X
X
X
X
6
6
2, 6
6
2, 6
2, 3, 6, 10, 13
.
X
2, 6, 10, 13, 14
X
11
2, 3, 6, 8, 9, 10,
13, 14.
Overhaul
CABLE ASSEMBLY, POWER ELECTRICAL CX-8413/GGM.
CABLE ASSEMBLY, SPECIAL PURPOSE, ELECTRICAL CX-8411/
GGM AND CX-8412/GGM.
RACK, SHELF ADAPTER RS-1A/
DAC-V; RS-2A/DAC-V.
RELAY ASSEMBLY NO. B10531
RELAY SUBASSEMBLY PC640-2
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER, TS1512/GGM.
Replace
Repair
Replace
Repair
Replace
Repair
Repair
Replace
Repair
Adjust
Test
X
X
X
X
.
.
Replace
Repair
Overhaul
TEST SET, SUBASSEMBLIES,
TELETYPEW'RITER (Repair all
assemblies except PC618-2).
TEST SET, SUBASSEMBLY, TELETYPEWRITER PC618-2.
OSCILLOSCOPE OS-119/GGM
11
6
1,2,3,6,10,12,13
X
X
.
X
X
Replace
Repair
X
X
Replace
X
External parts.
Interior parts.
All adjustments.
Visual only.
All tests.
Schmitt triggers, input filters, input circuits,
meter current, sweep voltage.
Intensity, marker test, transition test, signal
input, input power, percent distortion,
reset test.
Lamps, fuses, lenses.
2, 6
Except PC618-2.
Sweep bias adjustment, sweep amplitude
adjustment, syn gate adjustment,
horizontal bias adjustment, vertical bias
adjustment, blanking adjustments intensity
makes adjustment.
Ripple voltage test, free running sweep frequency test, power supply output voltage
test, percent regulation test.
Adjust
.
X
2, 10
Test
.
X
2, 3, 6, 7, 10
21
REMARKS
D
Section II. MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART (AN/GGM 1) -- Continued
PART
OR
COMPONENT
OSCILLOSCOPE OS-119/GGM-Con.
OSCILLOSCOPE SUBASSEMBLIES
GENERATOR, TIME BASE SG-430/
GGM.
GENERATOR, TIME BASE SUBASSEMBLIES.
GENERATOR, TEST PATTERN SG431/GGM.
GENERATOR, TEST PATTERN
SUBASSEMBLIES.
EXCEPT PC-619-2
GENERATOR, TEST PATTERN
SUBASSEMBLY PC-619-2.
POWER SUPPLY PP-2971/GGM
POWER SUPPLY SUBASSEMBLIES
MAINTENANCE
FUNCTION
CATEGORY
O/C
Replace
Repair
Overhaul
O
DS
TOOLS
REQUIRED
GS
X
X
X
Replace
Repair
Adjust
Test
Replace
Repair
Overhaul
Replace .
Repair
Test
Replace
Repair
Overhaul
D
11
2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8,
9, 10, 13, 14.
X
X
X
2, 6
1, 6, 10
X
1, 2, 3, 6, 10, 14
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
11
1,2,3,6,8,9,10,14
11
1,2,3,6,8,9,
10,12,13, 14.
X
Repair
Replace
X
X
2, 6
Test
X
2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 10
.
X
X
X
X
X
22
Lamp, fuses, tubes, cap electrical, lens.
Adjust output frequency of fixed oscillator
assy; adjust output frequency of variable
oscillator assy.
Output frequency and alarm, output voltage.
Lamps, fuses, lenses.
2, 6
1,2,3,6,10,12,13
Replace
Replace
Repair
Overhaul
Replace
Repair
REMARKS
11
2,3,6,7,8,9,10,14
2, 6
Lamps, fuses, lenses.
Except PC-619-2.
Input and output voltage test, regulation
tests, ripple test.
Fuses, cap electrical.
Section III. ALLOCATION TOOLS FOR MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS (AN/GGM- 1)
MAINTENANCE
CATEGORY
TOOLS REQUIRED FOR MAINTENANCE
FUNCTIONS
O/C
FREQUENCY METER AN/USM-26
MULTIMETER TS-352/U .
OSCILLOSCOPE AN/USM-81
TEST SET, ELECTRON TUBE TV-2/U
TEST SET, ELECTRON TUBE TV-7/U
TOOL KIT TK-21/G
TRANSFORMER, VARIABLE POWER CN-16/U
VOLTMETER TS-443/U
VOLTMETER, METER ME-30/U
TELETYPEWRITER TEST SET AN/GGM-1
TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT NORMALLY AVAILABLE
TO THE INSTALLER USER BECAUSE OF HIS
ASSIGNED MISSION.
TELETYPEWRITER SET TT-4/TG
POWER SUPPLY PP-351/U
TRANSISTOR TEST SET TS-1100/U .
O
DS
TOOLS
CODE
GS
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
23
REMARKS
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
To be provided as shop support.
To be provided as shop support.
Section IV. MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART (AN/GGM 2)
PART
OR
COMPONENT
TEST SET, TELETYPE WRITER AN/GGIM-2.
MAINTENANCE
FUNCTION
CATEGORY
O/C
Service
O
DS
TOOLS
REQUIRED
GS
X
X
X
Adjust
X
Inspect
Test
CABLE ASSEMBLY, POWER ELEC RICAL CX-8413/GGM.
CABLE ASSEMBLIES, SPECIAL
PURPOSE, ELECTRICAL CX8411/ GGM N.,D CX-3412/GGM.
CART, ELETYPEWRITER TEST
SET NO. D10010.
RELAY ASSEMBLY NO. B10531
RELAY SUBASSEMBLY PC-64Q-2
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER
TS-1512/GGM.
X
1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8,
9, 10, 12, 13.
1,2,3,4,6,7,8,9,
10, 12, 13, 14.
6
2, 6
11
2, 6
X
Repair
X
2,6
Repair
Replace
Repair
Adjust
X
X
X
X
2, 6
6
2, 6
2, 3, 6, 10, 13
X
2,6,10,13,14
X
Replace
Repair
Replace
Repair
Test
TEST SET SUBASSEMBLIES, TELETYPEWRITER (Repair all assemblies except PC618-2).
TEST SET SUBASSEMBLY, TELETYPEWRITER PC618-2.
11
6
1,2,3,6,10,12,13
2,3,4,6,7,10,11,12
X
Overhaul
Replace
Repair
Overhaul
Replace
Repair
X
X
X
.
X
X
X
X
X
Replace
X
24
REMARKS
D
11
2,3,6,8,9,10,13,14
2,6
External parts.
Internal parts.
All adjustments.
Visual only.
All tests.
Schmitt triggers, input filters, input circuits,
meter current, sweep voltage.
Intensity marker test, transition tests,
signal input, input power, percent distortion, reset test.
Lamps, fuses, lenses.
Except PC618-2.
Section IV. MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART (AN/GGM 2)
PART
OR
COMPONENT
OSCILLOSCOPE OS-19/GGM
MAINTENANCE
FUNCTION
O/C
O
DS
GS
2,10
Test
X
2, 3, 6, 7,10
X
11
2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8,
9, 10,13, 14.
X
X
Replace
Repair
GENERATOR, TEST PATTERN SG431/GGM.
Test
Replace
Repair
Overhaul
Replace Repair
Test
Replace
Repair
Overhaul-.
GENERATOR, TEST PATTERN
SUBASSEMBLY.
EXCEPT PC619-2
GENERATOR, TEST PATTERN
SUBASSEMBLIES PC-619-2.
POWER SUPPLY PP-2971/GGM
POWER SUPPLY SUBASSEMBLIES
X
X
X
X
X
2, 6
1, 6, 10 -
X
1, 2, 3, 6, 10, 14
.
X
X
11
1,2,3,6,8, 9, 10, 14
X
X
2, 6
1, 2, 3, 6, 10, 12, 13
X
11 1, 2, 3, 6,8, 9,
10, 12,13, 14.
X
X
Replace
X
Repair
Replace
X
X
2, 6-
Test
X
2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 10
Replace
Repair
Overhaul
Replace Repair
X
X
X
X
X
25
REMARKS
D
X
GENERATOR, TIME BASE Adjust
SG-430/ GGM.
GENERATOR, TIME BASE SUBASSEMBLIES.
TOOLS
REQUIRED
Adjust
Replace
Repair
Overhaul
OSCILLOSCOPE SUBASSEMBLIES
CATEGORY
11
2,3,6,7,8,9,10,142, 6
Sweep bias adjustment, sweep amplitude
adjustment, sync gate adjustment, horizontal bias adjustment, vertical bias
adjustment, blanking adjustment, intensity makeup adjustment.
Ripple voltage test, free running sweep
frequency test, power supply output
voltage test, percent regulation test.
Lamp, fuses, tubes, cap electrical, lens.
Adjust output frequency of fixed oscillator
assy, adjust output frequency of variable.
Output frequency and alarm, output voltage.
Lamps, fuses, lenses.
Lamps, fuses, tenses.
Except PC-619-2.
Input and output voltage tests, regulation
tests, ripple test.
Fuses, cap electrical.
Section V. ALLOCATION TOOLS FOR MAINTENANCE FUN CTIONS (AN/GGM-2)
MAINTENANCE
CATEGORY
TOOLS REQUIRED FOR MAINTENANCE
FUNCTIONS
O/C
FREQUENCY METER AN/USM-26
MULTINIETER TS-352/U
OSCILLOSCOPE AN/USM-81
TEST SET, ELECTRON TUBE TV-2/U
TEST SET, ELECTRON TUBE TV-7/U
TEST KIT TK-21/G
TRANSFORMER, VARIABLE POWER CN-16/U
VOLTMETER TS-443/U
VOLTMETER, METER ME-30/U
TELETYPEWRITER TEST SET AN/GGM-1
TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT NORMALLY
AVAILABLE TO THE INSTALLER USER BECAUSE
OF HIS ASSIGNED MISSION.
TELETYPEWRITER SET TT-4/TG
POWER SUPPLY PP-351/U
TRANSISTOR TEST SET TS-1100/U
O
DS
TOOLS
CODE
GS
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
26
REMARKS
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
To be provided as shop support.
To be provided as shop support.
Section VI. MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART (AN/GGM-3)
PART
OR
COMPONENT
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN/
GGM-3.
MAINTENANCE
FUNCTION
CATEGORY
O/C
Service
Adjust
Inspect
Test
O
DS
TOOLS
REQUIRED
GS
X
CABLE ASSEMBLY, POWER
ELECTRICAL CX-8413/GGM.
CABLE ASSEMBLIES, SPECIAL
PURPOSE.
ELECTRICAL CX-8411/GGM AND
CX-8412/GGM.
RACK, SHELF ADAPTERS RS1A/DAC-V, RS-2B/DAC-V.
RELAY ASSEMBLY B10531
RELAY SUBASSEMBLY PC-640-2.
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER
TS-1512/GGM.
TEST SET, SUBASSEMBLIES
TELETYPEWRITER (Repair all
assemblies except PC618-2).
TEST SET SUBASSEBLY, TELETYPEWRITER PC618-2.
Replace
Repair
Replace
11
6
1, 2, 3, 6, 10, 12, 13
X
X
X
X
Overhaul
X
X
X
X
1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8,
9, 10, 12, 13.
1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9,
10,12, 13, 14.
6
2, 6
11
Repair
X
2, 6
Replace
Repair
Repair
Replace
Repair
Adjust
X
X
X
X
X
X
6
6
2, 6
6
2, 6
2, 3, 6, 10, 13.
Test
X
2, 6, 20, 23, 24
Replace
Repair
Overhaul
Replace
Repair
X
X
X
X
X
Replace
X
27
REMARKS
D
11
2,3,6,8,9, 10, 13, 14
2,6
External parts.
Interior parts.
All adjustments.
Visual only.
All tests.
Schmitt triggers, input filter, input circuits,
meter current, sweep voltage.
Intensity marker test, transition test, signal
input, input power, percent distortion,
reset test.
Fuses, lamps, lens.
Except PC618-2.
Section VI. MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART (AN/GGM 3) Continued
PART
OR
COMPONENT
OSCILLOSCOPE OS-119/GGM
MAINTENANCE
FUNCTION
O/C
GENERATOR, TIME BASE SG-430/
GGM
GENERATOR TIME BASE SUBASSEMBLIES.
GENERATOR, TEST PATTERN SG431/GGM.
GENERATOR, TEST PATTERN
SUBASSEMBLIES EXCEPT PC 619-2.
GENERATOR, TEST PATTERN
SUBASSEMBLY PC-619-2.
POWER SUPPLY PP-2971/GGM
O
DS
TOOLS
REQUIRED
GS
X
2, 10
Test
X
2, 3, 6, 7, 10
X
11
2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8,
9, 10,13, 14.
X
X
Replace
Repair
Adjust
Test
Replace
Repair
Overhaul
Replace
Repair
Test
Replace
Repair
Overhaul
X
X
X
2, 6
1, 6, 10
X
1, 2, 3, 6, 10. 14
X
X
X
X
11
1,2,3,6,8,9,10.14
X
X
2, 6
1,2,3,6,10,12,13
X
11
1, 2, 3, 6, 8, 9,
10, 12,13, 14.
X
X
Replace
Repair
X
X
Replace
X
Test
X
2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 10
X
11
2, 3, 6, 7, 8,
9, 10,14.
Replace
Repair
Overhaul
X
X
POWER SUPPLY SUBASSEMBLIES - Replace
Repair
X
X
28
REMARKS
D
Adjust
Replace
Repair
Overhaul
OSCILLOSCOPE SUBASSEMBLIES
CATEGORY
2, 6
2, 6
Sweep bias adjustment, sweep amplitude
adjustment sync gate adjustment horizontal bias adjustment vertical bias
adjustment, blanking adjustment intensity
marks adjustment.
Ripple voltage test, free running sweep
frequency test power supply output voltage
test, percent regulation test.
Fuses, lamps, tubes, lens, cap electrical.
Adjust output frequency of fixed oscillator
assy, adjust output frequency of variable.
Output frequency and alarm, output voltage
Lamps, fuses, lenses.
Fuses, lamps, lens.
Except PC619-2.
Input and output voltage tests, regulation
tests, ripple tests.
Fuses, cap electrical.
Section VII. ALLOCATION TOOLS FOR MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS (AN/GGM-3)
MAINTENANCE
CATEGORY
TOOLS REQUIRED FOR MAINTENANCE
FUNCTIONS
O/C
FREQUENCY METER AN/USM-26
MULTIMETER TS-352/U
OSCILLOSCOPE AN/USM-81
TEST SET, ELECTRON TUBE TV-2/U
TEST SET, ELECTRON TUBE TV-7/U
TOOL KIT TK-21/G
TRANSFORMER VARIABLE POWER CN-16/U
VOLTMIETER TS-443/U
VOLTMETER, METER ME-30/U
TELETYPEW'RITER TEST SET AN/GGM-1
TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT NORMALLY AVAILABLE TO
THE INSTALLER USER BECAUSE OF HIS ASSIGNED
MISSION.
TELETYPEW'RITER SET TT-4/TG
POW-ER SUIPPLY PP-351,'U
TRANSISTOR TEST SET TS-1100/U
O
DS
TOOLS
CODE
GS
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
29
REMARKS
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
To be provided as shop support.
To be provided as shop support.
Section VIII. MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART (AN/GGM 4)
PART
OR
COMPONENT
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN'/
GGM-4.
MAINTENANCE
FUNCTION
O/C
Service
Adjust
Inspect
Test
Overhaul
CABLE ASSEMBLY, -POWER ELECTRICAL CX-8413/GGM.
CABLE ASSEMBLIES, SPECIAL
PURPOSE, ELECTRICAL, CX8411/GGM AND CX-8412/GGM.
RACK, SHELF ADAPTER RS-1A/
DAC-V.
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER TS1512/GGM.
TEST SET SUBASSEMBLIES, TELETYPEWRITER (Repair all assemblies
except PC618-2).
CATEGORY
Replace
Repair
Replace
Repair
O
DS
TOOLS
REQUIRED
GS
X
10
5
1, 2, 5, 9, 11
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,11
1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,
11, 12.
X
1, 5
10
1, 5
Replace
Repair
Adjust
X
X
X
5
5
1, 2, 5, 9, 11
Test
X
1, 5, 9, 11, 12
Replace
Repair
Overhaul
Replace
Repair
X
X
X
X
X
X
30
REMARKS
D
External parts.
Interior parts.
All adjustments.
Visual only.
All tests.
Schmitt triggers, input filter, input circuits,
meter current, sweep voltage.
Intensity maker test, transition test, signal
input, input power, percent distortion,
reset test.
10
Lamps, fuses, lens.
1, 2, 5, 7, 8, 9, 11, 12.
1, 5
Except PC618-2.
Section VIII. MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART (AN/GGM 4)
PART
OR
COMPONENT
TEST SET SUBASSEMBLY, TELETYPEWRITER PC618-2.
OSCILLOSCOPE OSll9/GGM
MAINTENANCE
FUNCTION
O/C
POWER SUPPLY PP-2971/GGM
POWER SUPPLY
SUBASSEMBLIES.
O
DS
TOOLS
REQUIRED
GS
X
Adjust
X
1, 9
Test
X
1, 2, 5, 6, 9
X
10
1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,
11, 12.
X
X
Replace
Repair
Test
Replace
Repair
Overhaul
Replace
Repair
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
31
REMARKS
D
Replace
Replace
Repair
Overhaul
OSCILLOSCOPE SUBASSEMBLIES
CATEGORY
1, 5
1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 9
10
1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 12.
1, 5
Sweep bias adjustment, weep amplitude
adjustment sync gate adjustment, horizontal bias adjustment, vertical bias adjustment, blanking adjustment, intensity
maker adjustment.
Ripple voltage test, free running sweep frequency test, power supply output voltage
test, percent regulation test.
Lamps, fuses, tubes, lens, cap electrical.
Input and output voltage tests, regulation
tests, ripple tests.
Fuses, cap electrical.
Section IX. ALLOCATION TOOLS FOR MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS (AN/GGM-4)
MAINTENANCE
CATEGORY
TOOLS REQUIRED FOR MAINTENANCE
FUNCTIONS
O/C
MULTIMETER TS-352/U
OSCILLOSCOPE AN/USM-81
TEST SET ELECTRON TUBE TV-2/U
TEST SET ELECTRON TUBE TV-7/U
TOOL KIT TK-21/G
TRANSFORMER VARIABLE POWER CN-16/U
VOLTMETER TS-443/U
VOLTMETER, METER ME-30/U
TELETYPEWRITER TEST SET AN/GGM-1
TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT NORMALLY AVAILABLE TO
THE INSTALLER USER BECAUSE OF HIS ASSIGNED MISSION.
POWER SUPPLY PP-351/U
TRANSISTOR TEST SET TS-1100/U
O
DS
TOOLS
CODE
GS
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
32
REMARKS
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
To be provided as shop support.
Section X. MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART (AN/GGM 5)
PART
OR
COMPONENT
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN/
GGM-5.
CABLE ASSEMBLY, POWER, CX8413/GGM.
CABLE ASSEMBLIES, SPECIAL PURPOSE, ELECTRICAL CX-8411/GGM
AND CX-8412/GGM.
RACK SHELF ADAPTER RS1B/DACV.
TEST SET, TELETYPWRITER TS1512/GGM
TEST SET SUBASSEMBLIES, TELETYPEWRITER (Repair all assemblies except PC618-2).
TEST SET SUBASSEMBLY, TELETYPEWRITER PC618-2.
POWER SUPPLY PP-2971/GGM
POWER SUPPLY SUBASSEMBLIES
MAINTENANCE
FUNCTION
CATEGORY
O/C
Service
Adjust
Inspect
Test
Overhaul
Replace
Repair
Replace
Repair
O
DS
TOOLS
REQUIRED
GS
X
External parts.
Interior parts.
X
X
1, 2, 3, 7, 9
X
Visual only.
X
1, 2,3, 4,5, 6, 7, 9
1,2,3,4,5,6,7,9,10
3
1, 3
8
1, 3
Replace
Repair
Adjust
X
X
X
3
3
1, 2, 3, 7, 9
Test
X
1, 3, 7, 9,10
Replace
Repair
Overhaul
ReplaceRepair
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Replace
X
Test
X
Replace
Repair
Overhaul
Replace Repair
REMARKS
D
X
X
X
X
X
33
8
1,2,3,4,5,6,7,9,10
1, 3
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7
8
1, 2,3, ,5, 6,7,10
1, 3
Schmitt triggers, input filters, input circuits
meter current, sweep voltage.
Intensity maker test, transition test
, signal
input, input power, percent distortion,
reset test.
Fuses, lamps, lens.
Except PC-618-2.
Input and output voltage tests, regulation
tests, ripple tests.
Fuses, cap Electrical.
Section XI. ALLOCATION TOOLS FOR MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS (AN/GGM-5)
MAINTENANCE
CATEGORY
TOOLS REQUIRED FOR MAINTENANCE
FUNCTIONS
O/C
MULTIMETER TS-352/U
OSCILLOSCOPE AN/USM-81
TOOL KIT TK-21/G
TRANSFORMER VARIABLE POWER CN-16/U
VOLTMETER TS-443/U
VOLTMETER, METER ME-30/U
TELETYPEWRITER TEST SET AN/GGM-1
TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT NORMALLY AVAILABLE
TO THE INSTALLER USER BECAUSE OF HIS ASSIGNED
MISSION.
POWER SUPPLY PP-351/U
TRANSISTOR TEST SET TS-1100/U
O
DS
TOOLS
CODE
GS
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
†
†
†
†
9
10
†
34
REMARKS
D
To be provided as shop support.
Add appendix IV after appendix III.
APPENDIX IV
ORGANIZATIONAL REPAIR PARTS LISTS
Section I. INTRODUCTION
illustrations of the equipment.
The
numbers in the "Figure No." column refer
to the illustration where the part, is shown.
2. Parts for Maintenance
When this equipment is used by Signal service
organizations organic to theater headquarters or
communication
zones
to
provide
theater
communications, those repair parts authorized up to and
including general support are authorized for stockage by
the organization operating this equipment.
3. Additional Repair Parts Authorization
An asterisk indicates that an item is not
authorized for stockage but if required, may be
requisitioned for immediate use only.
4. Requisitioning Information
a. The allowance factors are based on 100
equipments. In order to determine the number of parts
authorized for the specific number of equipments
supported, the following formula will be used and carried
out to two decimal places.
Specific number of equipments supported
allowance factor
X
100
= number of parts authorized.
b. Fractional values obtained from above
computation will be rounded to whole numbers as
follows:
(1) When the total number of parts authorized
is less than 1, the quantity authorized will
be 1.
(2) For all values above 1, fractional values
below 0.5 will revert to the next lower
number, fractional values of 0.5 or larger
will advance to the next higher whole
number.
c. The number of parts authorized, determined
after application of a and b above, represent one
prescribed load for a 15-day period. The items and
computed quantities thereof must be on hand or on
order at all times.
1. General
a. This appendix lists the quantities of repair parts
authorized for organizational maintenance and
constitutes a basis of requisitioning when the major item
of equipment is authorized to the organization. These
equipments are issued on the basis of allowances
prescribed in equipment authorization tables and other
documents which are a basis of requisitioning.
b. Columns are as follows:
(1) Federal stock number. This column lists
the 11-digit Federal stock number.
(2) Designation by model. Not used.
(3) Description.
Nomenclature or the
standard item name and brief identifying
data for each item are listed in this
column. When requisitioning, enter the
nomenclature and description.
(4) Unit of issue. The unit of issue is each
unless otherwise indicated and is the
supply term by which the individual item is
counted
for
procurement,
storage,
requisitioning, allowances, and issue
purposes.
(5) Expendability. Nonexpendable items are
indicated by NX. Expendable items are
not annotated.
(6) Quantity incorporated in unit. This column
lists the quantity of each part found in a
given
assembly,
component,
or
equipment.
(7) Organizational. The quantities indicated
in this column are maximum levels of
repair parts authorized to be kept on hand
by
units
performing
organizational
maintenance. The quantities are based
on 100 equipments to be maintained for a
15-day period.
(8) Illustration. The "Item No." column lists
the reference designations that appear on
the part in the equipment. These same
designations are also used on any
35
d. Major commanders will determine the number
of prescribed loads organizational units will carry. Units
and organizations authorized additional prescribed loads
will utilize the formula explained in a above but will
multiply the number of equipments supported by the
number of authorized prescribed loads before
completing the formula.
Fractional values will be
rounded to whole numbers as described above.
36
SECTION II. ORGANIZATIONAL FUNCTIONAL PARTS LIST (AN/GGM-1)
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
EXP
QTY
IN
UNIT
ORGA
NIZAT
IONAL
ILLUSTRATION
FIG. NO.
ITEM NO.
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN/GGM-1
6625-893-1725
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN/GGM-1: type of tests; Alignment of
start/stop and synchronous Telegraph Transmission Systems;
measures peak distortion of telegraph signals; mounted in Rack,
Shelf Adapter RS-IA/DAC-V, Rack, Shelf Adapter RS-2A/DAC-V; oper
pwr rqmts; 115 vac, 50/60 cyc, single ph
NX
1
GROUP I
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER TS-1512/GGM
5920-356-2188
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1/8 amp, 250 v; MIL type FO2GR125A (Authorized
allowances based on a total of 9.)
2
153.8
8
F2, F4
5920-280-5031
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1/4 amp, 250 v; MIL type FO2GR250A
1
*
8
F3
5920-280-4465
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1 amp, 250 v; MIL type FO2G1ROOA (Authorized
allowances based on a total of 3.)
1
66.7
8
Fl
6240-892-4420
LAMP, GLOW: G.E. part #NE2D (Authorized allowances based on a total
of 5.) (Items No. DS-2 (SIGNAL), DS-3 (EARLY), DS-4 (LATE))
3
*
26
See desc
column
6240-722-6467
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: G.E. part #344 (Authorized allowances based on
a total of 2.)
1
*
26
DS-1
(POWER)
6210-892-5737
LENS, INDICATOR LIGHT: Transitron Electronics part #RDL-7
(Authorized allowances based on a total of 6.)
4
*
26
POWER,
SIGNAL,
EARLY,
LATE
GROUP II
OSCILLOSCOPE OS-119/GGM
5920-283-7178
CAP, ELECTRICAL: Littelfuse part #342003SA-2 (Authorized
allowances based on a total of 5.)
1
*
10
5910-889-4363
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 40-40-80 uf, 350 v; Astron part
#EYT12251
1
*
7
C31
5910-865-3009
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 40-40-120 uf, 35 v; Aerovox part
#AFH3-29-75
1
*
7
C29
5910-060-6708
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 40-40-120 uf, 350 v; Astron part
#EYT1220
1
*
7
C30
37
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
EXP
QTY
IN
UNIT
ORGA
NIZAT
IONAL
ILLUSTRATION
FIG. NO.
ITEM NO.
AN/GGM-1 (continued)
5960-503-4880
ELECTRON TUBE: type OA2WA; MIL-E-1
1
*
38
V17
5960-166-7648
ELECTRON TUBE: type OB2; MIL-E-1
3
*
38
V16, V18,
V19
5960-272-8553
ELECTRON TUBE: type 1X2B; MIL-E-1
1
*
38
V15
5960-681-9802
ELECTRON TULE: type 6AU6WB; MIL-E-1
1
*
38
V9
5960-715-3894
ELECTRON TUBE: type 6DJ8; MIL-E-1
2
*
38
V3, V8
5960-669-8921
ELECTRON TUBE: type 12BH7A; M!L-E-1
2
*
38
V6, V11
5960-262-0210
ELECTRON TUBE: type 5814A; MIL-E-1
2
*
38
V5, V10
5960-669-6838
ELECTRON TUBE: type 5963; MIL-E-1
4
*
38
V1, V2, V4,
V7
5960-855-2875
ELECTRON TUBES: matched; c/o 1 each GV3A, 1 each GV6A; Stelma
part #A6473
1
*
38
V14
5920-284-6785
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: slo-blow; 2 amp, 125 v; MIL type F02D2R00B
1
*
10
F1
6240-683-0560
LAMP, INCA.TFESCENT: G.E. part #345
1
*
33
DS-5
(POWER)
6210-892-5737
LENS, INDICATOR, LIGHT (For authorized allowances see Group I.)
1
33
POWER
5960-296-4051
SHIELD, ELECTRON TUBE: Elco part #120V
1
*
5960-264-1031
SHIELD, ELECTRON TUBE: Elco part #149V
4
*
5960-284-9286
SHIELD, ELECTRON TUBE: Elco part #191V
8
*
5960-548-9301
SHIELD, ELECTRON TUBE: Elco part #195V
2
*
GROUP III
GENERATOR, TIME BASE SG-430(P)/GGM
5995-061-0031
CRYSTAL UNIT, QUARTZ: 93.237 kc; MIL type CR-37/U-93.237KC
NX
1
*
Y1
5955-689-8286
CRYSTAL UNIT, QUARTZ: 102.400 kc; MIL type CR-37/U-102.400KC
NX
1
*
Y1
38
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
EXP
QTY
IN
UNIT
ORGA
NIZAT
IONAL
ILLUSTRATION
FIG. NO.
ITEM NO.
AN/GCM-1 (continued)
5955-061-0032
CRYSTAL UNIT, QUARTZ: 115.200 kc; MIL type CR-37/U-115.200KC
NX
1
*
Y1
5455-813-9692
CRYSTAL UNIT, QUARTZ: 125.217 kc; MIL type CR-37/U-125.217KC
NX
1
*
Y1
5955-813-9743
CRYSTAL UNIT, QUARTZ: 152.016 kc; MIL type CR-37/U-152.016KC
NX
1
*
Y1
5955-813-9693
CRYSTAL UNIT, QUARTZ: 153.600 kc; MIL type CR-37/U-153.600KC
NX
2
*
Y1
5920-356-2188
FUSE, CARTRIDGE (For authorized allowances see Group I.)
2
13
F2, F3
5920-280-4465
FUSE, CARTRIDGE (For authorized allowances see Group I.)
1
13
F1
6240-892-4420
LAMP, GLOW (For authorized allowances see Group I.)
1
34
DS-15
6240-020-5730
LAMP, INCADESCENT: Stelma part #B952OX
13
*
34
DS1 thru
DS'7, DS-9
thru DS-14
6240-887-4770
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: Stelma part B39520/VAP
1
*
34
DS-8 (VAR)
6210-892-5737
LENS, INDICATOR, LIGHT (For authorized allowances see Group I.)
1
5985-887-1804
MODULE, BAUD RATE CONTROL PL-1098/GGM
NX
1
*
12
(37.5)
5985-887-4100
MOD'JLE, BAUD RATE CONTROL PL-1099/GGM
NX
1
*
12
(45.5)
5985-887-4103
MODULE, BAUD RATE CONTROL PL-1100/GGM
NX
1
*
12
(61.14)
5985-887-4104
MODULE, BAUD RATE CONTROL PL-1101/GGM
NX
1
*
12
(74.2)
5985-887-1806
MODULE, BAUD RATE CONTROL PL-1102/GGM
NX
1
*
12
(12.5
5985-887-1807
MODULE, BAUD RATE CONTROL PL-1103/GGM
NX
1
*
12
(150)
5945-615-1457
RELAY, ARMATURE: Sigma part #72AOZ160TS-TCP
1
*
23
K1
34
GROUP IV
GENERATOR, TEST PATTERN SG-431/GCM
5920-356-2188
FUSE, CARTRIDGE (For authorized allowances see Group I.)
3
16
F1, F2, F4
5920-280-4465
FUSE, CARTRIDGE (For authorized allowances see Group I.)
1
16
F3
39
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
EXP
QTY
IN
UNIT
ORGA
NIZAT
IONAL
ILLUSTRATION
FIG. NO.
ITEM NO.
AN/GGM-1 (continued)
6240-892-4420
LAMP, GLOW (For authorized allowances see Group I.)
1
27
DS-1
( SIGNAL)
6240-722-6467
LAMP, INCANDESCENT (For authorized allowances see Group I.)
1
27
DS2
(POWER)
6210-892-5719
LENS, INDICATOR, LIGHT: Transitron Electronic part #RD1L2
2
27
POWER &
SIGNAL
*
GROUP V
POWER SUPPLY PP-2971/CGM
5920-283-7178
CAP, ELECTRICAL (For authorized allowances see Group II.)
4
29
5920-356-2188
FUSE, CARTRIDGE (For authorized allowances see Group I.)
2
29
F1, F2
5920-295-7787
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 5 amp, 250 v; MIL type FO2G5ROOA
2
29
F3, F4
40
50.0
SECTION III. ORGANIZATIONAL FUNCTIONAL PARTS LIST (AN/GGM-2)
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
EXP
QTY
IN
UNIT
ORGA
NIZAT
IONAL
ILLUSTRATION
FIG. NO.
ITEM NO.
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN/GGM-2
6625-893-1726
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN/GGM-2: Alignment of start/stop and
synchronous Telegraph Systems, measures peak distortion of
telegraph signals; mounted in Equipment Housing EH-1/DAC-V; oper
pwr rqmts; 115 vac, 50/60 cyc, single ph
NX
2
GROUP I
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER TS-1512/GGM
5920-356-2188
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1/8 amp, 250 v; MIL type FO2GR125A (Authorized
allowances based on a total of 9.)
2
153.8
8
F2, F4
5920-280-5031
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1/4 amp, 250 v; MIL type FO2GR250A
1
*
8
F3
5920-280-4465
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1 amp, 250 v; MIL type FO2GLROOA (Authorized
allowances based on a total of 3.)
1
66.7
8
F1
6240-892-4420
LAMP, GLOW: G.E. part #NE2D (Authorized allowances based on a total
of 5.) (Items No. DS-2 (SIGNAL), DS-3 (EARLY), DS-4 (LATE))
3
*
26
See desc
column
6240-722-6467
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: G.E. part #344 (Authorized allowances based on
a total of 2.)
1
*
26
DS-1
(POWER)
6210-892-5737
LENS, INDICATOR LIGHT: Transitron Electronic part #RDL-7
(Authorized allowances based on a total of 6.)
4
*
26
POWER,
SIGNAL,
EARLY,
LATE
GROUP II
OSCILLOSCOPE OS-119/GGM
5920-283-7178
CAP, ELECTRICAL: Littelfuse part #342003SA-2 (Authorized
allowances based on a total of 5.)
1
*
10
5910-889-4363
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 40-40-80 uf, 350 v; Astron part
#EYT12251
1
*
7
C31
5910-865-3009
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 40-40-120 uf, 35 v; Aerovox part
#AFH3-29-75
1
*
7
C29
5910-060-6708
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 40-40-120 uf, 350 v; Astron part
#EYT1220
1
*
7
C30
5960-503-4880
ELECTRON TUBE: type OA2WA; MILE-1
1
*
38
V17
41
SECTION III. ORGANIZATIONAL FUNCTIONAL PARTS LIST (AN/GGM-2)
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
EXP
QTY
IN
UNIT
ORGA
NIZAT
IONAL
ILLUSTRATION
FIG. NO.
ITEM NO.
AN/GGM-2 (continued)
5960-166-7648
ELECTRON TUBE: type OB2; MIL-E-1
3
*
38
V16, V8, V1
5960-272-8553
ELECTRON TUBE: type 1X2B; MIL-E-1
1
*
38
V15
5960-681-9802
ELECTRON TUBE: type 6AU6WB; MIL-E-1
1
*
38
V9
5960-715-3894
ELECTRON TUBE: type 6DJ8; MIL-E-1
2
*
38
V3,V8
5960-669-8921
ELECTRON TUBE: type 12BH7A; MIL-E-1
2
*
38
V6,V11
5960-669-6838
ELECTRON TUBE: type 5963; MIL-E-1
4
*
38
V1,V2,V4,
V7
5960-262-0210
ELECTRON TUBE: type 5814A; MIL-E-1
2
*
38
V5,V10
5960-855-2875
ELECTRON TUBES: matched; c/o 1 each GV3A, 1 each GV6A; Stelma part
#A6473
1
*
38
V14
5920-284-6785
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: slow-blo; 2 amp, 125 v; MIL type F02D2ROOB
1
*
10
F1
6240-683-0560
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: G.E, part #345
1
*
33
DS-5
( POWER)
6210-892-5737
LENS, INDICATOR LIGHT (For authorized allowances see Group I.)
1
33
POWER
5960-296-4051
SHIELD, ELECTRON TUBE: Elco part #120V
1
*
5960-264-1031
SHIELD, ELECTRON TUBE: Elco part #149V
4
*
5960-284-9286
SHIELD, ELECTRON TUBE: Elco part #191V
8
*
5960-548-9301
SHIELD, ELECTRON TUBE: Elco part #195V
2
*
GROUP III
GENERATOR, TIME BASE SG-430(P)/GGM
5955-061-0031
CRYSTAL UNIT, QUARTZ: 93.237 kc; MIL type CR-37/U-93.237KC
NX
1
*
Y1
5955-689-8286
CRYSTAL UNIT, QUARTZ: 102.400 kc; MIL type CR-37/U-102.400KC
NX
1
*
Y1
5955-061-0032
CRYSTAL UNIT, QUARTZ: 115.200 kc; MIL type CR-37/U-115.200KC
NX
1
*
Y1
5955-813-9692
CRYSTAL UNIT, QUARTZ: 125.217 kc; MIL type CR-37/U-125.217KC
NX
1
*
Y1
42
SECTION III. ORGANIZATIONAL FUNCTIONAL PARTS LIST (AN/GGM-2)
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
EXP
QTY
IN
UNIT
ORGA
NIZAT
IONAL
ILLUSTRATION
FIG. NO.
ITEM NO.
AN/GGM-2 (continued)
5955-813-9743
CRYSTAL UNIT, QUARTZ: 152.016 kc; MIL type CR-37/U-152.016KC
NX
1
*
Y1
5955-813-9693
CRYSTAL UNIT, QUARTZ: 153.600 kc; MIL type CR-37/U-153.600KC
NX
2
*
Y1
5920-356-2188
FUSE, CARTRIDGE (For authorized allowances see Group I.)
2
13
F2, F3
5920-280-4465
FUSE, CARTRIDGE (For authorized allowances see Group I.)
1
13
F1
6240-892-4420
LAMP, GLOW (For authorized allowances see Group I.)
1
34
DS-15
6240-020-5730
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: Stelma part #B9520X
7
*
34
DS-1 thru
DS-7, DS-9
thru DS-14
6240-887-4770
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: Stelma part #B9520/VAR
1
*
34
DS-8 (VAR)
6210-892-5737
LENS, INDICATOR LIGHT (For authorized allowances see Group I.)
1
5895-887-1804
MODULE, BAUD RATE CONTROL PL-1098/GGM
NX
1
*
12
(37.5)
5895-887-4100
MODULE, BAUD RATE CONTROL PL-1099/GGM
NX
1
*
12
(45.5)
5895-887-4103
MODULE, BAUD RATE CONTROL PL-1100/GGM :
NX
1
*
12
(61.14)
5895-887-4104
MODULE, BAUD RATE CONTROL PL-1101/GGM
NX
1
*
12
(74.2)
5895-887-1806
MODULE, BAUD RATE CONTROL PL-1102/GGM
NX
1
*
12
(112.5)
5895-887-1807
MODULE, BAUD RATE CONTROL PL-1103/GGM
NX
1
*
12
(150)
5945-615-1457
RELAY, ARMATURE: Sigma part #72AOZ160TS-TCP
1
*
23
K1
34
GROUP IV
GENERATOR, TEST PATTERN SG-431/GGM
5920-356-2188
FUSE, CARTRIDGE (For authorized allowances see Group I. )
3
16
F1, F2, F4
5920-280-4465
FUSE, CARTRIDGE (For authorized allowances see Group I.)
1
16
F3
6240-892-4420
LAMP, GLOW (For authorized allowances see Group I.)
1
27
DS-1
(SIGNAL)
43
SECTION III. ORGANIZATIONAL FUNCTIONAL PARTS LIST (AN/GGM-2)
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
EXP
QTY
IN
UNIT
ORGA
NIZAT
IONAL
ILLUSTRATION
FIG. NO.
ITEM NO.
AN/GGM-2 (continued)
6240-722-6467
LAMP, INCANDESCENT (For authorized allowances see Group I.)
1
6210-892-5719
LENS, INDICATOR LIGHT: Transitron Electronic part #RDL-2
2
*
27
DS-2
(POWER)
27
POWER,
SIGNAL
GROUP V
POWER SUPPLY PP-2971/GGM
5920-283-7178
CAP, ELECTRICAL (For authorized allowances see Group II.)
4
29
5920-356-2188
FUSE, CARTRIDGE (For authorized allowances see Group I.)
2
29
F1,F2
5920-295-7787
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 5 amp, 250 v; MIL type FO2G5ROOA
2
29
F3,F4
44
50.0
SECTION IV. ORANIZATIONAL FUNCTIONAL PARTS LIST (AN/GGM-3)
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
EXP
QTY
IN
UNIT
ORGA
NIZAT
IONAL
ILLUSTRATION
FIG. NO.
ITEM NO.
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN/GGM-3
6625-893-1727
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN/GGM-3: measures peak distortion of
Telegraph Signals; provides automatic means of viewing signals;
transmits "quick brown fox" test message; mounted in Rack, Shelf
Adapter RS-LA/DAC-V Rack, Shelf Adapter RS-2B/DAC-V; oper pwr
rqmts, 115 vac, 50/60 cyc, single ph
NX
3
GROUP I
RACK SHELF ADAPTER RS-2B/DAC-V
5920-356-2188
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1/8 amp, 250 v; MIL type FO2GR125A (Authorized
allowances based on a total of 8.)
1
140.0
23
F1
8
F2, F4
GROUP II
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER TS-1512/GGM
5920-356-2188
FUSE, CARTRIDGE (For authorized allowances see Group I.)
2
5920-280-5031
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1/4 amp, 250 v; MIL type FO2GR250A
1
*
8
F3
5920-280-4465
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1 amp, 250 v; MIL type FO2G1R00A (Authorized
allowances based on a total of 2.)
1
50.0
8
F1
6240-892-4420
LAMP, GLOW: G.E. part #NE2D (Authorized allowances based on a total
of 4.) (Items No. DS-2 (SIGNAL), DS-3 (EARLY), DS-4 (LATE))
3
*
26
See desc
column
6240-722-6467
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: G.E. type #344 (Authorized allowances based on a
total of 2.)
1
*
26
DS-1
(POWER)
6210-892-5737
LENS, INDICATOR LIGHT: Transitron Electronics part #RDL-7
(Authorized allowances based on a total of 5.)
4
*
26
POWER,
SIGNAL,
EARLY,
LATE
GROUP III
OSCILLOSCOPE OS-119/GGM
5920-283-7178
CAP, ELECTRICAL: Littelfuse part #342003SA-2 (Authorized
allowances based on a total of 5.)
1
*
10
5910-889-4363
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 40-40-80 uf, 350 v; Astron part
#EYT12251
1
*
7
45
C31
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
EXP
QTY
IN
UNIT
ORGA
NIZAT
IONAL
ILLUSTRATION
FIG. NO.
ITEM NO.
AN/GGM-3 (continued)
5910-865-3009
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 40-40-120 uf, 35 v; Aerovox part
#AFH3-29-75
1
*
7
C29
5910-060-6708
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 40-40-120 uf, 350 v; Astron part
#EYT1220
1
*
7
C30
5960-503-4880
ELECTRON TUBE: type 0A2WA; MIL-E-1
1
*
38
V17
5960-166-7648
ELECTRON TUBE: type 0B2; MIL-E-1
3
*
38
V16, V18,
V19
5960-272-8553
ELECTRON TUBE: type 1X2B; MIL-E-1
1
*
38
V15
5960-681-9802
ELECTRON TUBE: type 6AU6WB; MIL-E-1
1
*
38
V9
5960-715-3894
ELECTRON TUBE: type 6DJ8; MIL-E-1
2
*
3
V3, V8
5960-669-8921
ELECTRON TUBE: type 12BH7A; MIL-E-1
2
*
3
V6, V11
5960-262-0210
ELECTRON TUBE: type 5814A; MIL-E-1
2
*
38
V5, V10
5960-669-6838
ELECTRON TUBE: type 5963; MIL-E-1
4
*
38
V1, V2, V4
V7
5960-855-2875
ELECTRON TUBES: matched; c/o 1 each GV3A, 1 each GV6A; Stelma part
#A6473
1
*
38
V14
5920-284-6785
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: slow-blo; 2 amp, 250 v; MIL type FO2D2R00B
1
*
10
F1
6240-683-0560
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: G.E. part #345
1
*
33
DS-6
(POWER )
6210-892-5737
LENS, INDICATOR LIGHT (For authorized allowances see Group II.)
1
*
33
POWER
5960-296-4051
SHIELD, ELECTRON TUBE: Elco part #120V
1
*
5960-264-1031
SHIELD, ELECTRON TUBE: Elco part #149V
4
*
5960-284-9286
SHIELD, ELECTRON TUBE: Elco part #191V
8
*
5960-548-9301
SHIELD, ELECTRON TUBE: Elco part #195V
2
*
46
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
EXP
QTY
IN
UNIT
ORGA
NIZAT
IONAL
ILLUSTRATION
FIG. NO.
ITEM NO.
AN/GGM-3 (continued)
GROUP IV
GENERATOR, TEST PATTERN SG-431/GGM
5920-356-2188
FUSE, CARTRIDGE (For authorized allowances see Group I.)
3
16
F1, F2, F4
5920-280-4465
FUSE, CARTRIDGE (For authorized allowances see Group II.)
1
16
F3
6240-892-4420
LAMP, GLOW (For authorized allowances see Group II.)
1
27
DS-1
(SIGNAL)
6240-722-6467
LAMP, INCANDESCENT (For authorized allowances see Group II.)
1
27
DS-2
(POWER)
6210-892-5719
LENS, INDICATOR LIGHT: Transitron Electronics part #RDL-2
2
27
POWER,
SIGNAL
*
GROUP V
POWER SUPPLY PP-2971/GGM
5920-283-7178
CAP, ELECTRICAL (For authorized allowances see Group III.)
4
29
5920-356-2188
FUSE, CARTRIDGE (For authorized allowances see Group I.)
2
29
F1, F2
5920-295-7787
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 5 amp, 250 v; MIL type FO2G5R00A
2
50.0
29
F3, F4
1
*
23
K1
GROUP VI
RACK, SHELF ADAPTER RS-1A/DAC-V
5945-615-1457
RALAY, ARMATURE: Sigma part #72AOZ160TS-TCP
47
SECTION V. ORGANIZATIONAL FUNCTIONAL PARTS LIST (AN/GGM-4)
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
EXP
QTY
IN
UNIT
ORGA
NIZAT
IONAL
ILLUSTRATION
FIG. NO.
ITEM NO.
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN/GGM-4
6625-803-1728
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN/CGM-4: measures peak distortion of
Telegraph Signals; automatic means of viewing signals while
traffic is being transmitted; mounted in Rack, Shelf Adapter
RS-1A/DAC-V; oper pwr rqmts; 115 vac, 50/60 cyc, single ph
NX
4
GROUP I
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER TS-1512/GGM
5920-356-2188
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1/8 amp, 250 v; MIL type FO2GR125A (Authorized
allowances based on a total of 4.)
2
82.4
8
F4, F4
5920-280-5031
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1/4 amp, 250 v; MIL type FO2GR250A
1
*
8
F3
5920-280-4465
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1 amp, 250 v; MIL type FO2G1R00A
1
*
8
F1
6240-892-4420
LAMP, GLOW: G.E. part #NE2D (Items No. DS-2 (SIGNAL), DS-3 (EARLY),
DS-4 (LATE))
3
*
26
See desc
column
6240-722-6467
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: G.E. part #344
1
*
26
DS-1
(POWER)
6210-892-5737
LENS, INDICATOR LIGHT: Transitron Electronics part #RDL-7
(Authorized allowances based on a total of 5.)
4
*
26
POWER,
SIGNAL,
EARLY,
LATE
GROUP II
OSCILLOSCOPE OS-119/GGM
5920-283-7178
CAP ELECTRICAL: Littelfuse part #342003SA-2 (Authorized
allowances based on a total of 5.)
1
*
10
5910-889-4363
CAPACITOR, FIXED, FIXED ELECTROLYTIC-: 40-40-80 uf, 350 v; Astron part
#EYT12251
1
*
7
C31
5910-865-3009
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 40-40-120 uf, 35 v; Aerovox part
#AFH3-29-75
1
*
7
C29
5910-060-6708
CAPACITOR, FIXED, ELECTROLYTIC: 40-40-120 uf, 350 v; Astron part
#EYT1220
1
*
7
C30
5960-503-4880
ELECTRON TUBE: type 0A2WA; MIL-E-1
1
*
38
V17
48
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
EXP
QTY
IN
UNIT
ORGA
NIZAT
IONAL
ILLUSTRATION
FIG. NO.
ITEM NO.
AN/GGM-4 (continued)
5960-166-7648
ELECTRON TUBE: type 0B2; MIL-E-1
3
*
38
V16, V18,
V19
5960-272-8553
ELECTRON TUBE: type 1X2B; MIL-E-1
1
*
38
V15
5960-681-9802
ELECTRON TUBE: type 6AU6WB; MIL-E-1
1
*
38
V9
5960-715-3894
ELECTRON TUBE: type 6DJ8; MIL-E-1
2
*
38
V3, V8
5960-669-8921
ELECTRON TUBE: type 12BH7A; MIL-E-1
2
*
38
V6, V11
5960-262-0210
ELECTRON TUBE: type 5814A; MIL-E-1
2
*
38
V5,V10
5960-669-6838
ELECTRON TUBE: type 5963; MIL-E-1
4
*
38
V1, V2, V4,
V7
5960-855-2875
ELECTRON TUBES: matched; c/o 1 each GV3A, 1 each GV6A; Stelma. part
#A6473
1
*
38
V14
5920-284-6785
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: slow-blo; 2 amp, 125 v; MIL type FO2D2R00B
1
*
10
F1
6240-683-0560
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: G.E. part #345
1
*
33
DS-5
(POWER)
6210-892-5737
LENS, INDICATOR LIGHT (For authorized allowances see Group I.)
1
33
POWER
5960-296-4051
SHIELD, ELECTRON TUBE: Elco part #120V
1
*
5960-264-1031
SHIELD, ELECTRON TUBE: Elco part #149V
4
*
5960-284-9286
SHIELD, ELECTRON TUBE: Elco part #191V
8
*
5960-548-9301
SHIELD, ELECTRON TUBE: Elco part #195V
2
*
GROUP III
POWER SUPPLY PP-2971/GGM
5920-283-7178
CAP, ELECTRICAL (For authorized allowances see Group II.)
4
29
5920-356-2188
FUSE, CARTRIDGE (For authorized allowances see Group I.)
2
29
F1, F2
5920-295-7787
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 5 amp, 250 v; MIL type FO2G5R00A
2
29
F3, F4
49
50.0
SECTION VI. ORGANIZATIONAL FUNCTIONAL PARTS LIST (AN/GGM5)
FEDERAL
STOCK NO.
6625-893-1735
DESIGNATION
BY MODEL
UNIT
OF
ISSUE
DESCRIPTION
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN/GGM-5: measures peak distortion of.
telegraph signals; mounted in Rack, Shelf Adapter 3S-1R/DAC-V;
oper pwr rqmts; 115 vac, 50/60 cyc, single ph
EXP
QTY
IN
UNIT
ORGA
NIZAT
IONAL
ILLUSTRATION
FIG. NO.
ITEM NO.
NX
GROUP I
TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER TS-1512/GGM
5920-356-2188
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1/8 amp, 250 v; MIL type FO2GR125A (Authorized
allowances based on a total of 6.)
4
J111.9
8
F2, F4
5920-280-5031
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1/4 amp, 250 v; MIL type FO2GR250A
2
50:0
8
F3
5920-280-4465
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 1 amp, 250 v; MIL type FO2G1R00A
2
50.0
8
F1
6240-892-4420
LAMP, GLOW: G.E. part #NE2D (Items No. DS-2 (SIGNAL), DS-2 (EARLY),
DS-4 (LATE))
6
*
26
See desc
column
6240-722-6467
LAMP, INCANDESCENT: G.E. part #344
2
*
26
DS-1
( POWER)
6210-892-5737
LENS, INDICATOR LIGHT: Transitron Electronics part #RDL-7
8
*
26
POWER,
SIGNAL,
EARLY,
LATE
*
29
GROUP II
POWER SUPPLY PP-2971/GGM
5920-283-7178
CAP, ELECTRICAL: Littelfuse part #342003SA-2
4
5920-356-2188
FUSE, CARTRIDGE (For authorized allowances see Group I.)
2
5920-295-7787
FUSE, CARTRIDGE: 5 amp, 250 v; MIL type FO2G5ROOA
2
50
50.0
29
F1, F2
29
F3, F4
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
HAROLD K. JOHNSON,
General, United States Army,
Chief of Staff.
Official:
J. C. LAMBERT,
Major General, United States Army,
The Adjutant General.
Distribution:
Active Army:
USASA (2)
USAMERCC (5)
ONGB (1)
LOGCOMD (2)
CC-E (7)
USAMICOM (4)
Dir of Trans (1)
USAMC (2)
CofEngrs (1)
USASCC (4)
TSG (1)
MDW (1)
CofSpts (1)
Armies (2)
USAODOEA (1)
Svc Colleges (2)
USAODCCBRA (1)
Br Svc Sch (2)
USACDCOEA (1)
USASTO (2)
USACDCOA (1)
USATC AD (2)
USACDCQMA (1)
USATC Armor (2)
USACDOTA (1)
USATC Engr (2)
USACDCADA (1)
USATC Inf (2)
USACDCARMA (1)
Army Pic Cen (2)
USACDCAVNA (1)
WRAMC (1)
USAODCARTYA (1)
Instl (2) except
USACDCSWA (1)
Ft Monmouth (70)
USACDCCEA:
Ft Hancock (4)
Ft Huachuca (1)
Ft Huachuca (10)
USAODCEC (10)
Ft Gordon (10)
USAMO (5)
Ft Carson (25)
USCONARO (5)
Ft Knox (12)
ARADCOM (5)
WSMR (5)
ARADOOM Rgn (2)
GENDEP (2)
OS MaJ Comd (4)
NG: None.
USAR: None.
For explanation of abbreviations used, see AR 320-50.
51
Sig Sec GENDEP (5)
Sig Dep (12)
A Dep (2) except
SAAD (30)
TOAD (14)
FTWOAD (10)
LEAD (7)
SHAD (3)
NAAD (5)
SVAD (5)
CHAD (3)
ATAD (10)
LBAD (14)
Sig Fld Maint Shops (2)
AMS (1)
USAERDAA (2)
USAERDAW (13)
Units organized under following
TOE's (2 copies each):
11-57
11337
11-97
11-500 (AA-AC)
11-98
11-i87
11-117
11-502
11-155
11-597
11-157
Changes in force: C1, C2, C3, C4, and C5
TM 11-6625-22-12
C5
Operator and Organization Maintenance Manual
TEST SETS, TELETYPEWRITER, AN/GGM-1, AN/GGM-2,
AN/GGM-3, AN/GGM-4, AND AN/GGM-5
CHANGE
No. 5
}
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
WASHINGTON 25, D. C., 9 March 1964
TM 11-6625-422-12, 6 October 1961, is changed as follows:
for improving this equipment manual is authorized and
encouraged. DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes
to DA Technical Manuals Parts Lists or Supply Manual
7, 8, or 9) will be used for reporting these
improvements. This form will be completed in triplicate,
using pencil, pen, or typewriter. The original and one
copy will be forwarded direct to Commanding Officer, U.
S. Army Electronics Materiel Support Agency, ATTN:
SELMS-MP, Fort Monmouth, N. J., 07703.
One information copy will be furnished to the individual's
immediate supervisor (officer, noncommissioned officer,
supervisor, etc.).
Page 7, paragraph 7a, line 2. Delete "paragraph 5a"
and substitute "appendix III".
Paragraph 8b, line 3. After "(fig. 8)," add: or 8.1).
Line 11. After "rear panel", add: The location of input
filter capacitors on digital distortion analyzers procured
on order No. 15559-PP-3 or 15644-PP-63 is shown in
figure 8.1.
Paragraph 10a, line 3. After "(fig. 12)", add: The
location of printed circuit cards in the time base
generators procured on order No. 15559-PP-63 or
15644-PP-63 is shown in figure 12.1.
Page 15, figure 8 (page 3 of C 3). In the figure
caption, after "analyzer", add: (bearing any order
number except 15559-PP-6S and 15644-PP-63).
Add figure 8.1 after figure 8.
Note.
The parenthetical reference to previous
changes (example: "page 1 of C 3") indicates that
pertinent material was published in that changes.
At the places listed below (page 1 of C 3), delete the
existing data opposite "Frequencies" (or "Frequency")
and substitute: 9.6 kc, 11.65 kc, 15.65 kc, 19.00 kc,
28.80 kc (12.80 kc on equipment bearing order No.
15559PP-63 or 15644-PP-63), 38.4 kc, and 7.68 kc to
28.18 kc (continuously variable).
Page 4, paragraph 4a second item under "Input timing
signals".
Page 5, paragraph 4:
Subparagraph c, first item under "Output timing
signals".
Subparagraph 4d, second item under "Input timing
signals".
Add the following note in the places listed below:
Note. Before using a time base generator make sure
that it has the same baud rate provisions as the
equipment with which it is used.
Page 23, after paragraph 14a.
Page 43, after paragraph 28a.
Page 43, paragraph 29, above subparagrapha.
Page 3, paragraph 2 (page 1 of C 3). Delete
subparagraph c and substitute:
c. Reporting of Equipment Manual Improvements.
The direct reporting, by the individual user, of errors,
omissions, and recommendations
TAGO 8274A
1
Figure 8.1. Digital distortion analyzer (bearing No. 15559-PP-63 or 15644-PP-63), rear view.
AGO 8274A
2
Figure 12.1. Time base generator (bearing No. 15559-PP-63 or 15644-PP-63), left side view.
AGO 8274A
3
Page 19, figure 12. In the figure caption, after
"generator", add: (bearing any order number except
15559-PP-63 and 15644-PP-63).
Add figure 12.1 after figure 12.
Page 23, paragraph 15. Delete paragraph 15 and
substitute:
15. Differences in Models
a. Various combinations of components used in
the AN/GGM-1 and AN/GGM-2 (figs. 1 and 2) are
employed in the AN/GGM3, AN/GGM-4, and AN/GGM-5
(figs.
3, 4, and 5).
These components are
interchangeable if they are equipped to supply the same
baud rates.
Note
The AN/GGM-1 and AN/GGM-2,
procured on order No. 16559-PP-65,
and the AN/GGM-3 and AN/GGM-5,
procured on order No. 15644-PP-63,
differ
from
equivalent
models
procured on other order numbers as
indicated in b below.
b. The time base generators, the digital distortion
analyzers, and the test pattern distortion generators
procured on order No. 15559PP-63 or 15644-PP-63
differ from equivalent components, procured on other
order numbers as follows:
(1) Time base generator (figs. 12 and 12.1).
(a) A 112.5-baud printed circuit card is
not provided, and the 74.2-baud
printed circuit card has been
inserted in its place.
(b) The 61.1-baud printed circuit card
has been inserted in the position
previously occupied by the 742baud
printed circuit card.
(c) A 50-baud printed circuit card has
been inserted in the position
previously occupied by the 61.1baud printed circuit card.
(d) The lamps in the left-hand column
on the front panel (fig. 34) are
marked so that, from top to bottom,
they indicate VAR, 37, 45, 50, 61,
74, and 150.
(2) Digital distortion analyzer (figs. 8 and 8.1),
The input filter capacitors (fig. 8) have
been reconnected (fig. 8.1) and the
markings on the front panel BAUDS
switch (fig. 26) have been changed to
VAR, 37, 45, 50, 61, 74, and 150 in order
to reflect the new
timing input signal arrangement ((1) above).
(3) Test pattern distortion generator (fig. 27). The
markings on the test pattern distortion generator
front panel BAUDS switch have been changed
to VAR, 37, 45, 50, 61, 74, and 150 in order to
reflect the new timing input signal arrangement
((1) above).
Page 33, figure 21. Add the following note:
NOTE:
ON ORDER No. 15559-PP-63. OUTPUT TIMING COAXIAL
CONNECTORS 1 THROUGH 7 ARE DESIGNATED  VAR ,
 37.5 ,  45 5 ,  50 ,  61.1 ,  74.2 , AND  150 ,
RESPECTIVELY.
Page 34, figure 22. Add the following note:
NOTE:
ON ORDER No. 15559-PP-63. OUTPUT TIMING COAXIAL
CONNECTORS ARE DESIGNATED.
FROM LEFT-TORIGHT.
 VAR ,  37.5 ,  45.5 ,  50 1 ,  61.1 ,  74.2 ,
AND  150 , RESPECTIVELY.
Page 36, figure 23. Add the following note:
NOTE:
ON ORDER No. 15559-PP-63. OUTPUT TIMING COAXIAL
CONNECTORS DESIGNATED  61.1 ,  74.2  AND 
112.5 , ARE DESIGNATED  50 ,  61.1 , AND 74.2 ,
RESPECTIVELY.
Page 38, figure 25. Add the following note:
NOTE:
ON ORDER No. 16644-PP-63. OUTPUT TIMING COAXIAL
CONNECTORS DESIGNATED  61.1 ,  74.2 , AND 
112.5 , ARE DESIGNATED  50 ,  61.1 , AND  74.2 ,
RESPECTIVELY.
Page 39, figure 26. Add the following note:
NOTE:
ON ORDER Nos. 15559-PP-63 AND 156644-PP-63. 
BAUDS  SWITCH IS MARKED VAR ,  37 ,  46 , 50
, 61 ,  74 , AND   150 .
Page 41, figure 27. Add. the following note:
NOTE:
ON ORDER Nos. 15565PP43 AND 1556-PP-63,  BAUDS ,
SWITCH IS MARKED  VAR ,  37   45 , 50 , 61 , 
74 , AND  150 ,
Page 58; figure 34. Add the following note:
NOTE:
ON ORDER Nos. 15669-PP-63 AND 16644-PP-63, LAMPS
MARKED  61   74 , AND  112 , ARE MARKED  50 ,
61 , AND 74 , RESPECTIVELY.
Page 88, paragraph 61b. Make the following changes:
Line 2. After "figure 12", add: or 12.1.
AGO 8274A
4
Chart. Delete the chart and substitute:
Symptom
Probable trouble
Corrective measures
AN/GGM-(') is defective when operated from
variable frequency oscillator (VAR).
AN/GGM-(') is defective when operated at
37.5 bauds.
AN/GGM-(') is defective when operated at
45.5 bauds.
AN/GGM-1, AN/GGM-2, AN/GGM-3, or
AN/GGM-5 is defective at 50 bauds (equipment procured on order No. 15559-PP-63
or 15644-PP-63 only).
AN/GGM-(') is defective when operated at
61.1 bauds.
AN/GMM-(') is defective when operated at
74.2 bauds.
AN/GMM-(') is defective when operated at
112.5 bauds. (Not applicable to equipment
procured on order No. 15559-PP-63 or
15664-PP-63.)
AN/GMM-(') is defective when operated at
150 bauds.
Faulty distribution of timing signals to
AN/GGM-(') component equipments.
Defective variable frequency oscillator assembly.
Defective 37.5-baud oscillator assembly -
Replace 37.5-baud oscillator assembly.
Defective 45.5-baud oscillator assembly
Replace 45.5-baud oscillator assembly.
Defective 50-baud oscillator assembly (equipment procured on order No. 15559-PP-63
or 15644-PP-63 only).
Replace 50-baud oscillator assembly (equipment procured on order No. 15559-PP-63 or
15644-PP-63 only).
Defective 61.1-baud oscillator assembly
Replace 61.1-baud oscillator assembly.
Defective 74.2-baud oscillator assembly
Replace 74.2-baud oscillator assembly.
Defective 112.5-baud oscillator assembly. (Not
applicable to equipment procured on order
No. 15559-PP-63 or 15644-PP-63.)
Replace 112.5-baud oscillator assembly. (Not
applicable to equipment procured on order
No. 15559-PP-63 or 15644-PP-63.)
Defective 150-baud oscillator assembly
Replace 150-baud oscillator assembly.
Defective interunit wiring -
Time base generator oscillator alarm functions incorrectly.
Defective alarm assembly
Make continuity checks of interunit wiring to
time base generator jack (2J2). Use figure
46, 47, or 48, as appropriate, as guide when
making checks.
Replace oscillator alarm assembly.
5
Replace variable frequency oscillator assembly.
Page 91, figure 38. Under "V16", change
"OA2" to: OB2. Under "V17", change "OA2" to: OA2WA.
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
EARLE G. WHEELER,
General, United States Army,
Chief of Staff.
Official:
J. C. LAMBERT,
Major General, United States Army,
The Adjutant General.
Distribution:
Active Army:
DASA
USASA
CNGB (1)
CSigO (7)
CofT (1)
CofEngrs (1)
CofSptS (1)
TSG (1)
USA CD Agc.v (2)
USAMC (5)
USCONARC (5)
ARADCOM (2)
ARADCOM Rgn (2)
OS Maj Comd (3)
Base Comd (2)
LOGCOMD (2)
USAECOM (7)
USAMICOM (4)
USASCC (4)
MDW (1)
Armies (2)
Corps (2)
USATC AD (2)
USATC Armor (2)
USATC Engr (2)
USATC Inf (2)
USASTC (2)
Instl (2) except
Ft Monmouth (63)
Ft Hancock (4)
GENDEP (OS) (2)
Sig Sec, GENDEP (5)
Sig Dep (OS) (12)
A Dep (2) except
Lexington (12)
Sacramento (28)
Tobyhanna (12)
Ft Worth (8)
Svc Colleges (2)
NG: None.
USAR: None.
For explanation of abbreviations used, see AR 320-50.
(6) Br Svc Sch (2) except
(2) USMA (2)
WRAMC (2)
USA Trans Tml Comd (1)
Army Tml (1)
USAOSA (1)
POE (1)
AMS (1)
Army Pic Cen (2)
USA Mbl Spt Cen (1)
USA Elct Mat Agcy (12)
Chicago Proc Dist (1)
Sig Fld Maint Shops (3)
USA Elct RD Actv
Ft Huachuca (2)
White Sands (13)
WSMR (5)
Yuma PG (2)
USA Corps (3)
USASA 1st Fld Sta (5)
ME Sig Agcy (5)
Letterkenny A Dep (5)
Pt Gordon (5)
Ft Huachuca (10)
Units org under fol TOE:
(2 copies each UNOINDC)
11-16
11-57
11-97
11-98
11-117
11-155
11-157
11-500 (AA-AE) (4)
11--557
11-587
11-592
11-597
6
TM 11-6625-422-12
C4
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual
TEST SETS, TELETYPEWRITER AN/GGM-I, AN/GGM-2, AN/GGM-3, AN/GGM-4,
AND AN/GGM-5
TM 11-6625-422-12
CHANGES NO. 4
}
HEADQUARTERS,
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
WASHINGTON 25, D.C., 19 July 1963
TM 11-6625-422-12, 6 October 1961, is changed as follows:
Note. The parenthetical reference to previous changes (example: "page 18 of C 2") indicates that pertinent
material was published in that changes.
Inside front cover, RADIATION HAZARDS notice. Delete the notice and substitute:
RADIATION HAZARDS
NI 63
Co 60
occurrence of trouble, to reduce downtime, and assure
that the equipment is serviceable.
a. Systematic Care. The procedures given in
paragraphs 51.1 through 51.3 cover routine systematic
care and cleaning essential to proper upkeep and
operation of the equipment.
b. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services.
The preventive maintenance checks and services charts
(pars. 51.2 and 51.3) outline functions to be performed
at specific intervals. These checks and services are to
maintain Army electronic equipment in combatserviceable condition; that is, in good general (physical)
condition and in good operating condition. To assist
operators in maintaining combat serviceability, the
charts indicate what to check, how to check, and what
the normal conditions are; the reference column lists the
illustrations, paragraphs, or manuals that contain
supplementary information. If the defect cannot be
remedied by the operator, higher echelon maintenance
or repair is required. Records and reports of the checks
and services must be made in accordance with the
requirements set forth in TM 38-750.
51.1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services
Periods
Preventive maintenance checks and services of
the AN/GGM-(*) are required on a daily and weekly
basis.
a. Paragraph 51.2 specifies checks and services
that must be accomplished daily and under the
conditions listed below.
(1) When the equipment is initially installed.
(2) When the equipment is reinstalled after
removal for any reason.
(3) At least once each week if the equipment
is maintained in standby condition.
b. Paragraph 51.3 specifies additional checks and
services that must be performed once each week.
Tubes types OA2WA and OB2WA used in the
OS-119/GGM contain radioactive material. These tubes
are potentially hazardous when broken; see qualified
medical personnel and the Safety Director if you are
exposed to or cut by broken tubes. Use extreme care in
replacing these tubes (par. 63) and follow safety
procedures in their handling, storage, and disposal.
Never place radioactive tubes in your pocket.
Use extreme care not to break radioactive tubes
while handling them.
Never remove radioactive tubes from cartons
until ready for use.
Refer to paragraph 67.1 for handling, storage,
and disposal of radioactive material.
Page 5, paragraph 4b. After last line, add:
Radioactive tubes:
Item
OA2WA
Isotope
Quantity (microcuries)
Ni 63
0.01
- 0.05
Co 60
0.0067
OB2WA
Ni 63
0.01
- 0.05
Co 60
0.0067
Page 68. Make the following changes:
Paragraph 50. Delete subparagraph a and
substitute:
a. General. The maintenance duties assigned to
the operator of the AN/GGM-(*) are listed below,
together with a reference to the paragraph covering the
specific maintenance function. The duties assigned
require the materials indicated in b below.
(1) Daily preventive maintenance checks and
services (par. 51.2).
(2) Weekly preventive maintenance checks
and services (par. 51.3).
(3) Visual inspection (par. 52).
(4) Equipment performance checklist (par.
53).
Paragraph 51.
Delete paragraph 51 and
substitute:
51. Preventive Maintenance
Preventive maintenance is the systematic care,
servicing, and inspection of equipment to prevent the
51.2. Daily Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services Chart
Sequence.
No.
1
Item
End item equipment
Procedure
Inspect equipment for completeness
AGO 5334A
2
Reference
App. III and figs. 1-5.
Sequence.
No.
2
Item
Cases and front panels
3
Indicator lamps and meters
4
Knobs and switches
5
Operation
Procedure
Wet a cloth with cleaning compound and clean
cases and front panels; dry cases and front
panels thoroughly with lint-free cloth.
While making operating checks (item 5 below),
check for burned-out indicator lamps, broken
glass on meters, and sticking needles in meters.
While making operating checks (item 5 below),
observe that mechanical action of each knob
and switch is smooth and free of external and
internal binding.
Check equipment operation
Reference
Figs. 1-5.
Figs. 1-5.
Figs. 1-5.
Par. 53.
51.3. Weekly Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services Chart
Note. Items 4 and 5 in the chart below should also be performed each time connections are changed.
Sequence.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Item
Exterior cases and front
panels.
External cables and cords
Exposed metal surfaces
Test pattern distortion generator loop current (AN/
GGM-1, AN/GGM-2, and
AN/GGM-3 only).
Relay bias (AN/GGM-1,
AN/GGM-2, and AN/
Procedure
Tighten loose screws, bolts, and mountings
Reference
Figs. 1-5.
Inspect for cuts, cracked or gouged jackets, fray- None.
ing, bad bruises, or kinks.
Inspect for rust and corrosion
Figs. 1-5.
Adjust loop current
Par. 30b.
Adjust relay bias
Page 69. Delete figure 36.
Page 70. Delete figure 37.
Page 86. Make the following changes:
Paragraph 55. Delete subparagraph a
and substitute:
a. The maintenance duties assigned to second
echelon maintenance personnel are listed below,
together with a reference to the paragraph covering the
specific maintenance function. The duties assigned
require the tools indicated in b below.
(1) Monthly preventive maintenance checks
and services (par. 56.2).
(2) Visual inspection (par. 57).
(3) Troubleshooting (pars. 58-62).
(4) Tube testing and replacement (par. 63)
(5) Removal and replacement of printed
circuit card assemblies (par. 64).
(6) Removal and. replacement of component
equipments (par. 65).
(7) Lubrication of power supply fan (par.
57.1).
Par. 30c.
Paragraph 56. Delete paragraph 56 and
substitute:
56. Preventive Maintenance
a. Preventive maintenance is the systematic care,
inspection, and servicing of equipment to maintain it in
serviceable condition, prevent breakdowns, and assure
maximum
operational
capability.
Preventive
maintenance is the responsibility of all echelons
concerned with the equipment and includes the
inspection, testing, and repair or replacement of parts or
subassemblies that inspection and tests indicate would
probably fail before the next scheduled periodic service.
Preventive maintenance checks of the AN/GGM-(*) at
the second echelon level are made at monthly intervals
unless otherwise directed by the commanding officer.
The preventive maintenance checks and services
should be scheduled concurrently with the periodic
service schedule of the other equipment in the station.
3
b. Maintenance forms and records to be used and
Add paragraphs 56.1 and 56.2 after
paragraph 56.
maintained on this equipment are specified in TM 38750.
56.2) in the sequence listed. Record all deficiencies or
56.1. Monthly Maintenance
shortcomings in accordance with the requirements of
Perform all the checks and services listed in the
TM 38-750.
monthly maintenance checks and services chart (par.
56.2. Monthly Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services Chart
Sequence
No.
1
Item
Procedure
Reference
Printed circuit assemblies
a. Inspect, seating of all printed circuit assema. Figs. 7, 11, 12, and
blies.
14.
b. Inspect for burns, chipping, cracked or b. None.
broken
conductors, and dirty contacts.
2
Resistors, bushings, and in- Inspect for cracks, chipping, blistering, discolor- None.
sulators.
ation, and moisture.
3
Jacks and connectors
Inspect for snug fit and good contact
Figs. 21-26.
4
Power supply air filter Check air filter for dirt, and clean if necessary
Fig. 17.
5
Interior cases
Clean interior, and tighten loose switches and
None.
mountings.
6
Variable capacitors in time
Check variable capacitors for dirt or moisture
None.
base generator.
7
Data-scan scope
Inspect cathode-ray tube for burned screen Fig. 9.
spots
8
Power supply
Adjust output voltages.
Par. 30a.
9
Exposed metal surfaces
Clean rust and corrosion from metal surfaces TM 9-213.
by
lightly sanding them with fine sandpaper. Brush
two thin coats of paint on the bare metal to
protect it from further corrosion.
Page 90, paragraph 63. Below the paragraph
67.1.
Handling, Storage, and Disposal of
heading, add the following warning:
Radioactive
Material
Warning: The OA2WA and OB2WA
Follow the procedures for safe handling,
type tubes used in the OS-119/GGM
storage, and disposal of radioactive materials as
contain radioactive material. Handle
directed bycarefully to avoid breaking.
a. TB SIG 225, Identification and Handling of
Page 93, paragraph 67. Add paragraph 67.1
Radioactive Signal Items.
after paragraph 67.
b. AR 40-580, Control of Hazards to Health from
Radioactive Materials.
c. AR 755-380, Disposal of Unwanted Radioactive
Material.
Page 100. Delete the appendix and substitute:
APPENDIX I
REFERENCES
Following is a list of applicable references available to the operator of Tests Sets, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-1,
AN/GGM-2, AN/GGM-3, AN/GGM-4, and AN/GGM-5. In addition to the references listed below, Instruction Data on the
Use of Weston Class 50 Model, 1 Voltmeter, Voltmeter TS-443/U is available.
AR 40-580
Control of Hazards to Health from Radioactive Materials.
AR 70-10
Army Materiel Testing.
4
AR 320-5
AR 320-50
AR 750-5
AR 755-380
DA Pam 108-1
DA Pam 310-4
DA Pam 310-21
FM 21-5
FM 21-6
FM 21-30
TB SIG 225
TM 9-213
TM 11-655
TM 11-5527
TM 11-6625-274-12
TM 38-750
Dictionary of United States Army Terms.
Authorized Abbreviations and Brevity Codes.
Organization, Policies and Responsibilities for Maintenance Operation.
Disposal of Unwanted Radioactive Material.
Index of Army Motion Pictures, Film Strips, Slides and Phono-Recordings.
Index of Technical Manuals, Technical Bulletins, Supply Manuals (Types
4, 6, 7, 8 and 9), Supply Bulletins, Lubrication Orders, and Modification
Work Orders.
Military Publications: Index of Supply Manuals Signal Corps.
Military Training.
Techniques of Military Instruction.
Military Symbols.
Identification and Handling of Radioactive Signal Items.
Painting Instructions for Field Use.
Fundamentals of Telegraphy (Teletypewriter).
Multimeters TS-352/U, TS-352A/U, and TS-352B/U.
Operator's and Organizational Maintenance Manual: Test Sets, Electron
Tube TV-7/U, TV-7A/U, TV-7B/U, and TV-7D/U.
The Army Equipment Record System and Procedures.
(Page 15 of C 2). After "SECTION X MAINTENANCE
ALLOCATION CHART", add: (AN/GGM5).
(Page 16 of C 2). After "SECTION XI ALLOCATION OF
TOOLS
FOR
MAINTENANCE
FUNCTIONS", add: (AN/GGM-5).
Appendix III. Make the following changes:
(Page 18 of C 2). After "SECTION II FUNCTIONAL
PARTS LIST", add: (AN/GGM-1).
(Page 20 of C 2). After "SECTION III FUNCTIONAL
PARTS LIST", add: (AN/GGM-2).
(Page 22 of C 2). After "SECTION IV FUNCTIONAL
PARTS LIST", add: (AN/GGM-3).
(Page 24 of C 2). After "SECTION V FUNCTIONAL
PARTS LIST", add: (AN/GGM-4).
(Page 26 of C 2). After "SECTION VI FUNCTIONAL
PARTS LIST", add: (AN/GGM-5).
Add the following items to section II (page 18 of
C 2), section III (page 20 of C 2), section IV (page 22 of
C 2), and section V (page 24 of C 2) under RUNNING
SPARE ITEMS, in the columns indicated below.
Page 100, appendix II. Make the following
changes:
(Page 3 of C 2). After "SECTION II. MAINTENANCE
ALLOCATION CHART", add: (AN/GGM1).
(Page 5 of C 2). After "SECTION III ALLOCATION OF
TOOLS
FOR
MAINTENANCE
FUNCTIONS", add: (AN/GGM-1).
(Page 6 of C 2). After "SECTION IV MAINTENANCE
ALLOCATION CHART", add: (AN/GGM2).
(Page 8 of C 2). After "SECTION V ALLOCATION OF
TOOLS
FOR
MAINTENANCE
FUNCTIONS", add: (AN/GGM-2).
(Page 9 of C 2). After "SECTION VI MAINTENANCE
ALLOCATION CHART", add: (AN/GGM3).
(Page 11 of C 2). After "SECTION VII ALLOCATION
OF
TOOLS
FOR
MAINTENANCE
FUNCTIONS", add: (AN/GGM-3).
(Page 12 of C 2). After "SECTION VIII MAINTENANCE
ALLOCATION CHART", add: (AN/GGM4).
(Page 14 of C 2). After "SECTION IX ALLOCATION OF
TOOLS
FOR
MAINTENANCE
FUNCTIONS", add: (AN/GGM-4).
5
Section II (page 18 of C 2), column 2.
Change "6625-843-1731" to: 6625-8931731.
Change "5920-264-9493" to: 5920-2849493 in
the following places:
2
5910-865-3009
2
5910-060-6708
5910-889-4363
4
CAPACITOR, FIXED
ELECTROLYTIC:
40-40-120 µf, 350v;
Astron part No.
EYT1220.
CAPACITOR, FIXED
ELECTROLYTIC:
40-40-80 µf, 350v;
7
1
1
8
7
7
9
C30
4
Astron part NO.
EYT12251.
CAPACITOR, FIXED
ELECTROLYTIC:
40-40-120 µf, 35v;
Aerovox part No.
AFH3-29-95.
7
1
8
9
7
C31
Section II (page 18 of C 2).
Section III (page 20 of C 2).
Section IV (page 23 of C 2).
Section V (page 25 of C 2).
Section VI (page 26 of C 2).
C31
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
EARLE G. WHEELER,
General, United States Army,
Chief of Staff.
Official:
J. C. LAMBERT,
Major General, United States Army,
The Adjutant General.
Distribution:
Active Army:
DASA (6)
USATC Engr (2)
USASA (2)
USATC Inf (2)
CNGB (1)
USATC Armor (2)
CofEngrs (1)
USASTC (5)
TSG (1)
Instl (2) except
CSigO (7)
Ft Monmouth (65)
CofT (1)
Svc Colleges (2)
CSptS (1)
Br Svc Sch (2) except
USA CD Agcy (1)
GENDEP (OS) (2)
USCONARC (5)
Sig Dep (OS) (12)
USAMC (5)
Sig Sec, GENDEP (5)
ARADCOM (2)
Army Dep (2) except
ARADCOM Rgn (2)
Ft Worth (8)
OS Maj Comd (3)
Lexington (12)
OS Base Comd (2)
Sacramento (28)
LOGCOMD (2)
Tobyhanna (12)
USAECOM (5)
USA Elct RD Actv, White Sands (13)
USAMICOM (4)
USA Elct RD Actv, Ft Huachuca (2)
USASCC (4)
USA Trans Tml Comd (1)
MDW (1)
Army Tml (1)
Armies (2)
POE (1)
Corps (2)
USAOSA (1)
USA Corps (3)
AMS (1)
USATC AD (2)
WRAMC (1)
NG: State AG (3); units-same as active Army except one (1) copy to each unit.
USAR: None.
For explanation of abbreviations used, see AR 320-50.
6
AFIP (1)
Army Pic Cen (2)
USA Mbl Spt Cen (1)
USA Elct Mat Agcy (12)
Chicago Proc Dist (1)
USARCARIB Sig Agcy (1)
Sig Fld Maint Shop (3)
Units org under fol TOE
(2 cy ea UNOINDC)
11-7
11-16
11-57
11-97
11-98
11-117
11-155
11-157
11-500 (AA-AC) (4)
11-557
11-587
11-592
11-597
TM 11-6625-422-12
C3
Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual
TEST SETS, TELETYPEWRITER AN/GGM-1, AN/GGM-2, AN/GGM-3
AN/GGM-4, AND AN/GGM-5
}
TM 11-6625-422-12
CHANGES No. 3
HEADQUARTERS,
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
WASHINGTON 25, D. C., 7 February 1963
TM 11-6625-422--12, 6 October 1961, is changed as follows:
Note. The parenthetical reference to previous changes (example: "page 1 of C1") indicates that pertinent
material was published in that changes.
on this publication direct to: Commanding Officer, U.
S. Army
Electronics Materiel Support Agency,
Page 3, paragraph 1. Add paragraph 1.1 after
ATTN:
SELMS-MP,
Fort Monmouth, N. J. (DA Form
paragraph 1.
1598
(Record
of
Comments
on Publications), DA Form
1.1. Index of Publications
2496 (Disposition Form), or letter may be used.)
Refer to the latest issue of DA PAM 310-4 to
Paragraph 2.1 (C1). Delete paragraph 2.1.
determine whether there are new editions, changes, or
Page 4, paragraph 4a, input timing signals.
additional publications pertaining to your equipment.
Change
the characteristics opposite "Frequencies" to
Department of the Army Pamphlet No. 310-4 is a
read: 9.6 kc, 11.65 kc, 15.64 kc, 19.00 kc, 28.81 kc,
current index of technical manuals, technical bulletins,
38.4 kc, and 7.8 kc to 28.2 kc (continuously variable).
supply bulletins, lubrication orders, and modification
work orders that are available through publications
Page 5, paragraph 4. Make the following
supply channels. The index lists the individual parts (changes:
10, -20, -35P, etc.) and the latest changes to and
Subparagraph c, output timing signals.
revisions of each equipment publication.
Change the characteristics opposite "Frequency" to
Paragraph 2 (C1). Delete paragraph 2 and
read: 9.6 kc, 11.65 kc, 15.64 kc, 19.00 kc, 28.81 kc,
substitute:
38.4 kc, and 7.8 kc to 28.2 kc (continuously variable).
2. Forms and Records
Subparagraph d, input timing signals.
a. Reports of Maintenance and Unsatisfactory
Change the characteristics opposite "Frequency" to
Equipment.
Use equipment forms and records in
read: 9.6 kc, 11.65 kc, 15.64 kc, 19.00 kc, 28.81 kc,
38.4 kc, and 7.8 kc to 28.2 kc (continuously variable).
accordance with instructions in TM 38-750.
Subparagraph e, third item. Change the
b. Report of Damaged or Improper Shipment. Fill
characteristic opposite "Number of transistors" to: 8.
out and forward DD Form 6 (Report of Damaged and
Improper Shipment) as prescribed in AR 700-58 (Army),
Paragraph 5 (C1). Delete subparagrapha
NAVSANDA Publication 378 (Navy), and AFR 71-4 (Air
and substitute:
Force).
a. The components of the AN GGM-(*) are listed in
c. Comments on Manual. Forward all comments
appendix III.
Page 7. Make the following changes:
Paragraph 6, chart. Add the following:
1
Signal Corps nomenclature
Cable Assembly, Special Purpose,
Electrical CX-8411/GGM.
Cable Assembly, Special Purpose,
Electrical CX-8412/GGM.
Cable Assembly, Power,
Electrical CX-8413/GGM.
Cable Assembly, Special Purpose,
Electrical CX-8414/GGM-2.
Cable Assembly, Special Purpose,
Electrical CX-8415/GGM-2.
Manufacturer's nomenclature
Cable Assembly C11716
Common name
20-conductor cable.
Cable Assembly C11745-1
54-conductor cable.
Cable Assembly A13004
. 6-foot power cord.
Cable Assembly, Beldin 17656
6 ¼ foot power cord.
Cable Assembly A13003
. 2 ½ -foot power cord.
Page 20, figure 13. Change the following panel
markings: Change "+15V" to: RELAY. Change "RELAY"
to: + 15V.
Page 23, paragraph 13f, line 1.
Change
"adapters" to: adapter.
Page 28, paragraph 19. Make the following
changes:
Add the following to the chart:
Page 7, paragraph 8b, line 10.
Change
"mounted on two small printed circuit cards" to: mounted
on a printed circuit card.
Page 11, figure 4. In the callout for the shelf
adapter, change the designation "1B" to: 1A.
Page 15, figure 8.
Delete figure 8 and
substitute new figure 8.
Item
Radio Frequency Cable
RG-62A/U
Plug UG-260/U
AN/GGM-1
Required for installation of:
AN/GGM-2
AN/GGM-3
AN/GGM-4
X
X
X
AN/GGM-5
X
X
X
terminal 14, white lead to terminal 15) on
the AN/GGM2 (fig. 22).
(2) In equipment cart.
(a) Connect the terminal end of the CX8415/GGM-2 (21/½ -foot power cord) as
indicated in (1) above.
(b) Plug the other end of the CX8415/GGM-2
into the female receptacle on the rear of
the equipment cart.
(c) Connect the female plug of the
CX8414/GGM-2 (61/t-foot power cord)
into the male receptacle on the rear of the
equipment cart.
Page 35, paragraph 25. Make the following
changes.
Add the following caution beneath
subparagraph a.
Caution: To avoid damage to the
input circuit, adjust the loop current
to the desired
Paragraph 20a(1), line 1.
Change
"components" to: component.
Page 29, paragraph 21 (C1), Introduction.
In the second sentence, change "1B" to: 2B.
Page 32, paragraph 23. Delete paragraph 23
and substitute:
23. Input Ac Power Connections
Warning: Do not connect the
equipment to the ac power source
until all rear panel connections have
been made (par. 24 through 29).
a. AN/GGM-1,
AN/GGM-3,
AN/GGM-4,
or
AN/GGM-5. Connect the terminal ends of the CX8413/GGM (6-foot power cord) to the PWR terminals
(green lead to GRD terminal; black and white leads to
117 v ac terminals) of terminal board LTBI of the AN/
GGM-1 (fig. 21), AN/GGM-3) (fig. 23), AN/GGM-4 (fig.
24), or AN/GGM-5 (fig. 25).
b. AN/GGM-2.
(1) Removed from equipment cart and rack
mounted. Connect the terminal end of the
CX-8413/GGM to terminal board 3TB2
(black lead to terminal 13, green lead to
2
Figure 8. Digital distortion analyzer, rear view.
3
Subparagraph (6).
Delete the last
sentence and substitute: Tighten the locknut and check
to see that the meter still indicates 15 volts. Remove
the meter leads.
Subparagraph (7), last line. After "120
volts" add: ± 20 percent.
Subparagraph (8), line 7. After "21 volts"
add: ± 5 percent.
Page 63, paragraph 43a. Make the following
changes:
Subparagraph (4). Add after the first
sentence: (Stepped operation is not available for the
REVERSALS test pattern.)
Subparagraph (5). Delete the second
sentence and substitute: If specific characters are to be
generated, set the MARK-SPACE switches as outlined
in c below. If any selected test pattern is to be distorted,
set the DISTORTION switches as outlined in b below.
Page 71, paragraph 53b, chart. In item 4,
"Normal indications" column, change "generators" to:
generator.
Page 86, paragraph 55a. Add subparagraph (7)
after subparagraph (6).
(7) Lubrication of power supply fan (para
57.1).
Subparagraph b.
Make the following
changes: In line 1, add after "the tools": materials.
Add subparagraphs (5) and (6) after
subparagraph (4).
(5) Oiler (FSN 4930-277-1044).
(6) Oil, Engine, Internal Combustion Engine
(FSN 9150-265-9425).
Page 87. Add paragraph 57.1 after paragraph
57.
57.1. Lubrication of Power Supply Fan
Note. Only those power supply fans
identified with a gold-colored label
require lubrication semiannually. To
lubricate the fan motor, proceed as
follows:
a. Locate the small oilhole below the OIL marking
on the label.
b. Place a small amount of oil in the oiler.
c. Place the oiler needle at the center of the
oilhole, and position it at an angle of approximately 45°
to the surface of the label.
d. Pierce the label and the self-sealing rubber cap
located under the label. Insert the needle approximately
one-fourth of an inch.
level before connecting the input
loop to the analyzer. Check to see
that the setting of the INPUT'I'
SELECT switch (fig. 26) is in the
proper position before the input loop
power is applied.
Add
subparagraph
a
(3)
after
subparagraph a(2).
(3) Adjust the input current to the desired
level.
Note. Readjustment of the input loop
current is necessary to compensate for
the added loop resistance of the input
circuit.
Page 39, figure 26. Make the following
changes
Change the panel marking "HIGH Z
INPUT" to: HIGH Z IN.
Change the panel marking "LOW Z
INPUT to: LOW Z IN.
Page 44, paragraph 29. Make the following
changes:
Subparagraph b, second line. Delete the
parenthetical statement and substitute: (Use Cable,
Radio Frequency RG-62A/U, FSN 6145-161-0903.)
Subparagraph c.
Delete the first sentence and
substitute: Assemble Connector, Plug, Electrical UG260B/'U (FSN 5935-173-5895) on each end of each
length of coaxial cable.
Paragraph 30a.
Make the following
changes:
Introduction. Delete the introduction and
substitute:
a. Power Supply Output Voltages. The power
supply is directly accessible at the rear panel of the AN,
GGM-1, AN/GGM-3, AN/GGM-4, and AN/GGM-5, and
located under the hinged door on the rear panel of the
AN/GGM-2. Adjust the output voltages of the power
supply as follows:
Subparagraph (1). Delete and substitute:
(1) Connect the male plug of the
CX8413/GGM or CX-8414/GGM-2 to the
ac power source and operate the Power
switch (fig. 29) to ON.
Subparagraph (4).
Delete the last
sentence and substitute: Tighten the locknut and check
to see that the meter still indicates 15 volts. Remove
the meter leads.
4
Station 9, terminal 6. Change "10-17" to:
11-17
Figure 48 (foldout).
Make the following
changes:
Station 9, terminal 18. Change "10-2" to:
10-32.
Station 12, terminal 18. Change "24-2"
to: 21-2.
Figure 49 (foldout), caption. Change "1A" to:
1B.
e. Inject a small amount of oil (1 or 2 drops) into
the fin motor, and then remove the needle.
Figures 44 and 45 (foldouts). Delete figures 44
and 45 and substitute new figures 44 and 45.
Figure 47 (foldout).
Make the following
changes:
Station 6, terminal 18. Change "8-31" to:
11-21.
Station 9, terminal 5. Change "10-19" to:
11-19.
Figure 44. Test Sets, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-1 and AN/GGM-3, test pattern
distortion generator output circuit configuration.
(To be located in back of Change 3)
Figure 45. Test Set, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-2, test pattern
distortion generator output circuit configuration.
(To be located in back of Change 3)
5
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
EARLE G. WHEELER,
General, United States Army,
Chief of Staff.
Official:
J. C. LAMBERT,
Major General, United States Army,
The Adjutant General.
Distribution:
Active Army:
DASA (6)
USATC FA (2)
USASA (2)
USATC Armor (2)
CNGB (1)
Instl (2) except
CofEngrs (1)
Ft Monmouth (63)
TSG (1)
Svc Colleges (2)
CSigO (5)
Br Svc Sch (2)
CofT (1)
GENDEP (OS) (2)
USA CD Agcy (1)
Army Dep (2) except
USCONARC (5)
Sacramento (17)
Hq, Army Mat Comd (5)
Lexington (12)
ARADCOM (2)
Tobyhanna (12)
ARADCOM Rgn (2)
Ft Worth (8)
OS Maj Comd (3)
Sig Sec, GENDEP (OS) (5)
OS Base Comd (2)
Sig Dep, (OS) (12)
LOGCOMD (2)
WRAMC (1)
USA Elct Comd (5)
AFIP (1)
USA Msl Comd (4)
USA Elct RD Actv,
USA Strat Comm Comd (4)
White Sands (13)
MDW (1)
USA Elct RD Actv,
Armies (2)
Ft Huachuca (2)
Corps (2)
USA Trans Tml Comd (1)
USA Corps (3)
Army Tml (1)
USATC AD (2)
POE (1)
USATC Engr (2)
OSA (1)
USATC Inf (2)
AMS (1)
NG: None.
USAR: None.
For explanation of abbreviations used see AR 320-50.
6
Army Pic Cen (2)
USA Mob Spt Cen (1)
USA Elct Mat Agcy (25)
Chicago Procurement Dist (1)
USARCARIB Sig Agcy (1)
Sig Fld Maint Shops (3)
Yuma Test Sta (2)
JBUSMC (2)
Units org under fol TOE (2
cy ea UNOINDC)
11-7
11-16
11-57
11-97
11-98
11-117
11-155
11-157
11-500 (AA-AD) (4)
11-557
11-587
11-592
11-597
Figure 44. Test Sets, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-1 and AN/GGM-3, test pattern
distortion generator output circuit configuration.
Figure 45. Test Sets, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-2, test pattern
distortion generator output circuit configuration.
TM 11-6625-422-12
C1
TECHNICAL MANUAL
Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual
TEST SETS, TELETYPEWRITER ANIGGM-1, ANIGGM-2, ANIGGM-3, ANIGGM-4,
AND ANIGGM-5
TM 11-6625-422-12
HEADQUARTERS,
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
CHANGES No. 1
WASHINGTON 25, D.C., 14 August 1982
}
TM 11-6625-422-12, 6 October 1961, is changed as follows:
Page 3. Make the following changes: Paragraph2d, line 5. Delete "PA2d" and substitute:
MPP4.
Page 5, paragraph 5a, chart. Delete the chart and substitute:
Component
Test Set, Teletypewriter TS-1512/GGM
Oscilloscope OS-119/GGM
Generator, Time Base SG-430/GGM
Generator, Test Pattern 8SG-431/GGM
Power Supply PP-2971/GGM
Equipment Housing, EH-I/DAC-V*
Equipment Cart, EC-1/DAC-V*
Rack Shelf Adapter, RS-1A/DAC-V*
Rack Shelf Adapter, RS-1B/DAC-V*
Rack Shelf Adapter, RS-2A/DAC-V*
Rack Shelf Adapter, RS-2B/DAC-V *
Relay Assembly, B10531*
Cable Assembly, C11716*
Cable Assembly, C11745-1*
Cable Assembly, A13004 power cord (6 ft)
Cable Assembly, Beldin 17656*
Cable Assembly, A13003 3* conductor (2 ft)
AN/GGM-1
1
1
1
1
1
AN/GGM-2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
AN/GGM-3
1
1
AN/GGM-4
1
1
AN/GGM-5.
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I
1
1
1
*Manufacturer’s nomenclature.
1
1
1
1
1
1
Page 6, paragraph 5. Make the following
changes:
Subparagraph b, "Unit weight (lb)"
column.
Delete the data in the "Unit weight (lb)"
column and substitute:
Page 29, paragraph 21, introduction. Delete the
first sentence and substitute: The AN/GGM-1 and
AN/GGM-2 are shipped with a Sigma 72 mechanical
relay mounted in the rear of the SG-430/GGM. The
AN/GGM-3 is shipped with a Sigma 72 mechanical relay
mounted in shelf adapter 1B.
Paragraph 22a, note. Delete note and
substitute:
Note: If an uppercase character
(number, symbol, etc.) is included in
the call-letter sequence, preceded
and
followed
by
lowercase
characters, the uppercase character
program must be preceded by a FIGS
character and followed by a LTRS
character.
When an uppercase
character is used in this manner,
only five call letters can be used.
Page 31, paragraph 22b, chart. Make the
following changes:
CHARACTER 2, first line, under "R77."
Delete "X".
CHARACTER 3, 17th line, under "R84."
Add "X".
CHARACTER 4, second line, under
"R87."
Delete "X".
CHARACTER 7, under "R103":
Fourth line. Add "X".
Fifth line. Delete "X".
Page 52, paragraph 34d.
Delete the first
sentence and substitute: To illustrate the techniques of
distortion analysis which may be made with the
AN/GGM-(*), transparent overlay illustrations (figs. 51
and 52, located in rear of manual) may be used in
conjunction with figures 40 through 43.
Page 62, paragraph 43a(1), line five, Delete
"(available only with SELECTED CHARACTER and
REVERSAL message)." Page 98. Delete figure 51.
Page 99. Delete figure 52.
Unit weight lb)
97
189
91
68
55
Subparagraph
5c,
"Unit
weight
(lb)"
column.
Delete the data in the "Unit weight (lb)"
column and substitute:
Unit weight (lb)
15
28
12
9
14
40
71
12
11
7
10
Page 26, paragraph 16a, chart, "Unit weight (lb)"
column. Delete data in the "Unit weight (lb)" column
and substitute:
Unit weight (lb)
311
340
155
260
181
175
2
Figure 51. Data/telegraph signals with various bias distortion conditions.
(Transparency in envelope at back of manual)
Figure. 52. Data/telegraph signal with various speed error and distortion conditions.
(Transparency in envelope at back of manual)
BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF THE ARMY:
G. H. DECKER,
General, United States Army,
Chief of Staff.
Official:
J. C. LAMBERT,
Major General, United States Army,
The Adjutant General.
Distribution:
Active Army:
DASA (6)
USATC Engr (2)
USASA (2)
USATC Inf (2)
CNGB (1)
USATC FA (2)
Tech Stf, DA (1) except CSigO (14) USATC Armor (2)
Tech Stf Bd (1)
USAOMC (2)
USCONARC (5)
Svc College (2)
USAARTYBD (1)
Br Svc Sch (2)
USAARNIBD (2)
GENDEP (2) except Atlanta
USAIB (1)
GENDEP (None)
USARADBD (2)
Sig Sec, GENDEP (5)
USAAVNBD (1)
Sig Dep (12) except Sacramento
USA Abn, Elct & SPWAR Bd (1)
(17)
USAATBD (1)
WRAMC (1)
ARADCOM (2)
USATrans Tml Comd (1)
ARADCOM Rgn (2)
Army Tml (1)
OS Mhaj Comd (3)
POE (1)
OS Base Comd (2)
OSA (1)
LOGCOMD (2)
USAEPG (2)
MDW (1)
AFIP (1)
Armies (2)
AMS (1)
Corps (2)
Army Pictorial Cen (2)
Instis (2)
EMC (1)
Pt Monmouth (68)
Yuma Test Sta (2)
USATC AD (2)
USA Strat Comm Comd (4)
NG: None.
USAR: None.
For explanation of abbreviations used, see AR 320-50.
3
USASSA (25)
USASSAMRO (1)
USARCARIB Sig Agcy (1)
USA Sig Misl Spt Agcy (13)
Sig Fld Maint Shops (3)
Def Log Svc Cen (1)
USA Corps (3)
JBUSMC (2)
Units organized under following
TOE's (2 copies unless otherwise indicated):
11-7
11-16
11-57
11-97
11-98
11-117
11-155
11-157
11-500 (AA-AE) (4)
11-557
11-587
11-592
11-597
TM 11-6625-422-12
TECHNICAL MANUAL
No. 11-6625-422-12
HEADQUARTERS,
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
WASHINGTON 25, D.C., 6 October 1961
}
OPERATOR AND ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TEST SETS, TELETYPEWRITER AN/GGM-1, AN/GGM-2,
AN/GGM-3, AN/GGM-4, AND AN/GGM-5
Paragraph
CHAPTER 1.
Section I.
II.
CHAPTER 2.
Section I.
II.
CHAPTER 3.
Section I.
INTRODUCTION
General ...............................................................................................
Description and data ...........................................................................
INSTALLATION
Service upon receipt of equipment.......................................................
Installation of Test Set, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-(*) ............................
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Fundamentals of start-stop and synchronous telegraphy and distortion
measurement techniques of AN/GGM-(*). ...........................................
II.
III.
IV.
CHAPTER 4.
5.
6.
Operator's controls, indicators, and jacks ............................................
Operation under usual conditions ........................................................
Operation under unusual conditions.....................................................
OPERATOR'S MAINTENANCE ...........................................................
SECOND ECHELON MAINTENANCE.................................................
SHIPMENT AND LIMITED STORAGE AND DEMOLITION TO PREVENT
ENEMY USE
Section I. Shipment and limited storage...............................................................
II. Demolition of materiel to prevent enemy use ......................................
APPENDIX
REFERENCES ....................................................................................
INDEX
............................................................................................................
1
Page
1, 2
3-15
3
3
16, 17
18-30
26
28
31-34
48
35-39
40-45
46-49
50-54
55-65
54
60
66
68
86
66, 67
68, 69
93
94
100
101
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
Section I. GENERAL
forward DA Form 468 (Unsatisfactory Equipment
1. Scope
Report) to the Commanding Officer, U.S. Army Signal
a. This manual describes Test Sets, Teletypewriter
Materiel Support Agency, ATTN: SIGMS-ML, Fort
AN/GGM-1, AN/GGM-2, AN/ GGM-3, AN/GGM-4, and
Monmouth, N.J., as prescribed in AR 70038.
AN/GGM-5, and covers the installation, operation, and
operator's and organizational maintenance of the
b. Report of Damaged or Improper Shipment. Fill
equipment. It includes instructions for the installation of
out and forward DD Form 6 (Report of Damaged or
each of the sets, operation under usual and unusual
Improper Shipment), as prescribed in AR 700-58.
conditions, cleaning, and inspection of the equipment,
c. Preventive Maintenance Forms. Prepare DA
and replacement of parts available to first and second
Form 11-266 (figs. 36 and 37) (Maintenance Check List
echelon maintenance personnel.
for Signal Equipment (Test Equipment)) in accordance
b. Official nomenclature followed by (*) is used to
with instructions on the form.
indicate all five sets of the equipment covered in this
d. Comments on Manual.
Forward all other
manual. Thus, Test Sets, Teletypewriter, AN/GGM-(*)
comments concerning this manual direct to the
represents Test Sets, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-1,
Commanding Officer, U.S.
Army Signal Materiel
AN/GGM-2, AN/GGM-3, AN/GGM-4, and AN/GGM-5.
Support Agency, ATTN: SIGMSPA2d, Fort Monmouth,
2. Forms and Records
N.J.
a. Unsatisfactory Equipment Reports. Fill out and
Section II. DESCRIPTION AND DATA
3. Purpose and Use
a. Test Set, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-(*) is an integrated group of digital test equipments that provides facilities for
comprehensive analysis of synchronous and start-stop data/telegraph signals to determine the types and magnitudes of
signal distortion present in the signal.
b. The AN/GGM-(*) may be used to provide a continuous indication of system performance for quality control
functions as well as a test instrument for troubleshooting and testing data/ telegraph equipment and systems.
4. Technical Characteristics
a. Test Set, Teletypewriter TS-1512/GGM.
Input signals:
Start-stop........................................................... 7 to 16 unit intervals/character.
Synchronous ..................................................... All codes.
Input signal current ........................................................ 20 or 60 ma neutral, 20 or 30 ma polar, and high-impedance
(bridging) polar.
Input signal baud rates .................................................. Up to 600 (specific rates determined by timing signals available from Generator, Time Base SG-430/GGM).
3
Input timing signals:
Waveform ........................................................ Square wave.
Frequencies ...................................................... 9.6 kc, 11.65 kc, 15.65 kc, 18.99 kc, 28.81 kc, 38.4 kc, and
7.6 kc to 28.1 kc (continuously variable).
Input impedances:
Neutral input:
20 ma ......................................................... 300 ohms.
60 ma ......................................................... 100 ohms.
Polar input:
20-30 ma..................................................... 300 ohms.
High impedance ......................................... 50,000 ohms.
Timing signal input ........................................... 1,000 ohms.
Range of distortion measurement .................................. 0. to 60%.
Types of distortion measurement................................... Total peak, early peak, late peak, and average.
Modes of distortion measurement ................................. All character segments or selected character segments.
Distortion display:
Percent ............................................................. Direct-indicating meter.
Sign................................................................... Early and late indicator lamps.
Meter reset .................................................................... Manual or automatic (at 3-second interval).
Long-term measurement accuracy................................. ±2%.
Number of transistors .................................................... 175.
Operating temperature range ........................................ 0°C. to 50°C.
Input power requirements:
+15 vdc ............................................................ 250 milliwatts.
-15 vdc ............................................................. 15 watts.
-120 vdc ............................................................ 360 milliwatts.
+21 vdc ............................................................. 600 milliwatts.
b. Oscilloscope OS-119/GGM.
Input signals from TS-1512/GGM:
Vertical .............................................................. Input loop signal.
Horizontal ......................................................... 64 bit/interval digital sweep.
Transition sync ................................................. Trigger ½ bit prior to transition selected by TS-1512/GGM
TRANSITION SELECT control.
Blanking ............................................................ Blanking interval corresponding to stop mark in start-stop
input signal.
Character sync .................................................. Trigger corresponding to beginning of start space of stopstart input signal.
Intensity............................................................. Intensifying pulses to modulate crt during transition sense
period and selected input signal transitions.
Display modes:
Unblanked ......................................................... Successive display of the input signal characters to the
TS-1512/GGM.
Automatic blanking ........................................... Single character display followed by adjustable blanking
interval.
Manual blanking ................................................ Single character display for each actuation of front panel
pushbutton.
Triggered .......................................................... Single character segment displayed on expandable sweep
(with blanking options).
Free................................................................... Conventional test oscilloscope display.
Auto character blank range ........................................... 500 milliseconds to 3 seconds.
Type of display .............................................................. Intensity and deflection-modulated, 5-inch crt.
Vertical sensitivity ......................................................... 1.5 volts/cm.
Horizontal sweep speed (internal) .................................. 75 to 3 ms, 2.5 to 8 m, 7.5 to 30 ms, 25 to 80 ms, 75 to
300 ms.
Type of deflection ......................................................... Electrostatic.
Sweep calibration .......................................................... .±2%.
Number of tubes ........................................................... 19 (including crt).
Operating temperature range ........................................ 0°C. to 50°C.
Input power requirements (self-contained power
supply):
Voltage ............................................................. 110 to 117 vac.
4
Frequency ......................................................... 50 to 60 cps, single phase.
Power ............................................................... 120 watts.
c. Generator, Time Base SG-430/GGM.
Output timing signals:
Frequency ........................................................ 9.6 kc, 11.65 kc, 16.65 kc, 18.99 kc, 28.8 kc, 38.4 kc, and 7.6
kc to 28.1 kc (continuously variable).
Waveform ......................................................... Square wave.
Stability ............................................................ One part in 10,000.
Power ............................................................... 30 milliwatts.
Output impedance ......................................................... 100 ohms.
Frequency-determining element .................................... Quartz crystals and stabilized Wein bridge oscillator.
Number of transistors..................................................... 85.
Operating temperature range......................................... 0°C. to 50°C.
Input power requirements:
10 vac, 60 cps .................................................. 4 watts (w/alarm buzzer on).
+15 vdc ............................................................ 90 milliwatts.
-15 vdc ............................................................. 7 watts.
-120 vdc ............................................................ 120 milliwatts.
d. Generator, Test Pattern SG-431/GGM.
Output test signals:
Patterns ............................................................ Test-message, reversals, and selected characters.
Selected character codes .................................. 5 to 8 unit intervals/character.
Baud rates ........................................................ Up to 600 (specific rates determined by timing signals available from Generator, Time Base SG-430/GGM.
Current .............................................................. Neutral or polar.
Distortion ........................................................... 0 to 49%, marking, spacing, or switched bias.
Character release modes .................................. Stepped, steady mark, and free running.
Input timing signals:
Waveform ......................................................... Square wave.
Frequency ........................................................ 9.6 kc, 11.65 kc, 15.65 kc, 18.99 kc, 28.8 kc, 38.4 kc, and 7.6
to 28.1 kc (continuously variable).
Accuracy of selected distortion ...................................... ±2%.
Output keying................................................................. Electronic or mechanical relay.
Number of transistors .................................................... 249.
Operating temperature range ........................................ 0 °C. to 50°C.
Input power requirements:
+15 vdc ............................................................ 300 milliwatts.
-15 vdc .............................................................. 11 watts.
-120 vdc ........................................................... 30 milliwatts.
e. Power Supply PP-2971/GGM.
Output voltages.............................................................. +15 vdc, -15 vdc, -120 vdc, +21 vdc, and 10 vac.
Regulation .................................................................... ±1% for +15 vdc and -15 vdc, and ±5% for +21 vdc,
(-120 vdc and 10 vac unregulated).
Number of transistors..................................................... 7.
Operating temperature range......................................... 0°C. to 50°C.
Input power requirements:
Voltage ............................................................. 110 to 117 vac.
Frequency ......................................................... 50 to 60 cps, single phase.
Power ............................................................... 100 watts.
5. Components of Test Set, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-(*)
a. The component of each of the AN/GGM- (*)'s are listed in the following chart:
Component
Test Set, Teletypewriter TS-1512/GGM
Oscilloscope OS-119/GGM
Generator, Time Base SG-430/GGM
AN/GGM-1
1
1
1
AN/GGM-2
1
1
1
5
AN/GGM-3
1
1
AN/GGM-4
1
1
AN/GGM-5
2
Component
Generator, Test Pattern SG-431/GGM
Power Supply PP-2971/GGM
Equipment Housing, EH-1/DAC-V*
Equipment Cart, EC-1/DAC-V*
Rack Shelf Adapter, RS-1A/DAC-V*
Rack Shelf Adapter, RS-1B/DAC-V*
Rack Shelf Adapter, RS-2A/DAC-V*
Rack Shelf Adapter, RS-2B/DAC-V*
* Manufacturer's nomenclature.
AN/GGM-1
1
1
AN/GGM-2
1
1
1
1
AN/GGM-3
1
1
AN/GGM-4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
b. The dimensions and weight of each of the AN/GGM-(*)'s are listed in the following chart:
Model
AN/GGM-1
AN/GGM-2
AN/GGM-3
AN/GGM-4
AN/GGM-5
Height
(in.)
19
57
19
12 ¼
12 ¼
Depth
(in.)
20
29
20
20
20
Width
(in.)
19
25
19
19
19
Unit weight
(lb)
80
140
70
53
40
c. The dimensions and weight of each component of the AN/GGM-(*) are listed in the following chart:
Component
TS-1512/GGM
OS-119/GGM
SG-431/GGM
SG-430/GGM
PP-2971/GGM
EH-1/DAC-VB*
EC-1/DAC-VB*
RS-1A/DAC-V*
RS-1B/DAC-V*
RS-2A/DAC-V*
RS-2B/DAC-V*
* Manufacturer's nomenclature.
Height
(in.)
12 ¼
12 ¼
5¼
5¼
9¾
21 ½
36
12 ¼
12 ¼
6½
6½
Depth
(in.)
11 ½
19
19
19
7
23
29
19 ¼
19 ¼
19 ¼
19 ¼
Width
(in.)
8
8
8
8
8
19 5/8
25
19
19
19
19
Unit weight
(lb)
11
27
9
10
25
23
35
5
5
4
4
6. Nomenclature and Common Names
Signal Corps nomenclature
Test Sets, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-1,
AN/GGM-2, AN/GGM-3, AN/GGM4, and AN/GGM-5.
Test
Set,
Teletypewriter
TS1512/GGM
Oscilloscope OS-119/GGM
Generator, Time Base SG-430/GGM
Generator, Test Pattern SG-431/GGM
Power Supply PP-2971/GGM
Manufacturer's nomenclature
Signal Data Analysis Groups DAC-VA,
DAC-VB, DAC-VC, DAC-VD, and
DAC-VE (respectively)
Digital Distortion Analyzer DD-5/DAC-
Digital distortion analyzer
V
Data Scan Scope DSS-5/DAC-V
Time Base Generator TBG-5/DAC-V
Test Pattern Distortion Generator PG105/DAC-V
Power Supply PS-5/DAC-V
Data-scan scope
Time base generator
Test pattern distortion generator
Power supply
6
Common name
Signal Corps nomenclature
Manufacturer's nomenclature
Common name
None
Equipment Housing EH-1/DAC-V
Equipment housing
None
Equipment Cart EC-1/DAC-V
Equipment cart
None
Rack Shelf Adapter RS-1A/DAC-V
Shelf adapter 1A
None
Rack Shelf Adapter RS-1B/DAC-V
Shelf adapter 1B
None
Rack Shelf Adapter RS-2A/DAC-V
Shelf adapter 2A
None
Rack Shelf Adapter RS-2B/DAC-V
Shelf adapter 2B
panel. All operating controls are on the front panel. The
7. Description of Test Set, Teletypewriter AN/ GGMdigital distortion analyzer is secured in position in the
(*)
shelf adapter by tightening the front panel chassis
(figs. 1-5)
securing knob.
a. The basic components of each AN/GGM(*) are
9. Description of Data-Scan Scope
listed in paragraph 5a. The equipment cart included in
(figs. 9 and 10)
the AN/GGM-2 provides portability.
The data-scan scope (fig. 9) contains 19 tubes,
b. Operating power for the digital distortion
including
the 5-inch cathode-ray tube (crt).
All
analyzer, time base generator, and test pattern distortion
connections
to
the
unit
are
made
through
a
rear
panel
generator is supplied by the power supply. The dataconnector (P1, fig. 10). The power fuse (F1) is located
scan scope has a self-contained power supply. The
on the rear panel. All operating controls are located on
interconnecting wiring between the components of the
the front panel. Controls normally used only during
AN/GGM*) is located on the rear of the shelf adapters d
maintenance are located on the chassis side panels.
behind the equipment housing rear panel. Signal,
The data-scan scope is secured in position in the shelf
power, loop battery, and other user connections are
adapter (or in the equipment housing) by tightening the
made to terminals located on the rear of the shelf
front panel chassis securing knob.
adapters and equipment housing.
10. Description of Time Base Generator
8. Description of Digital Distortion Analyzer
(figs. 11, 12, and 13)
(figs. 6-8)
a. The time base generator (fig. 11) includes a
a. The digital distortion analyzer (fig.
6) is
basic chassis and nine printed circuit cards (fig. 12).
composed of a basic chassis and 18 printed circuit
Mounting slots for seven additional printed circuit cards
cards, which are inserted into the left side of the chassis
(not included) are provided. The mechanical relay for
(fig. 7) and secured in position by two hinged braces
the test pattern distortion generator, used in the AN/
(printed circuit card retainers). Hinged levers (not
GGM-1 and AN/GGM-2., is contained on a small
shown) are provided on each printed circuit card for
subchassis at the rear of the time base generator. The
removing the card.
status (active or nonoperative) of each oscillator card is
b. All power and timing signals are applied to the
indicated by front panel lamps.
digital distortion analyzer through a connector (P1) on
b. Input and output signal and power connections
the rear of the unit (fig. 8). The connector mates with a
are made through a rear panel connector (P1, fig. 13).
plug on the inside rear panel of the shelf adapter (1A or
The fuses (F1, F2, and F3) for the unit are also located
lB) or equipment housing when the digital distortion
on the rear panel. Operating controls and indicators are
analyzer is inserted. The fuses, input signal filter
on the front panel.
capacitors, and external indicator resistor for the digital
distortion analyzer are mounted on two small printed
circuit cards accessible through cutouts in the rear
7
Figure 1. Test Set Teletypewriter AN/GGM-1.
8
Figure 2. Test Set, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-2.
9
Figure 3. Test Set, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-3.
10
Figure 4. Test Set, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-4.
11
Figure 5 Test Set, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-5.
12
Figure 6. Digital distortion analyzer, front oblique view.
13
Figure 7. Digital distortion analyzer, left side view.
14
Figure 8. Digital distortion analyzer, rear view.
15
Figure 9. Data-scan scope, front oblique view.
16
Figure 10. Data-scan scope, rear view.
17
Figure 11. Time base generator, front oblique view.
18
Figure 12. Time base generator, left side view.
AGO 1969A
19
Figure 13. Time base generator, rear view.
power connections are made through a rear panel
connector (fig. 18). The rear panel also contains guide
pins at the upper corners to aid in the alignment of the
chassis for installation in the shelf adapter or equipment
housing. The power switch, test points, fuses, and
voltage adjust controls are on the front panel.
11. Description of Test Pattern Distortion Generator
(figs. 14, 15, and 16)
a. The test pattern distortion generator (fig. 14)
consists of a basic chassis and 21 printed circuit cards
which are inserted into the right side of the chassis (fig.
15). The cards are secured in position by a printed
circuit card retainer.
13. Description of Minor Components
The minor components associated with each of
the AN/GGM-(*)'s are listed in paragraph 5a and
illustrated in figures 1 through 5.
a. The equipment housing (fig. 2) is a console
housing for mounting the five components of the
AN/GGM-2. Power for the operation of the components
is applied through a connector on the equipment
housing rear panel and distributed by internal wiring in
the equipment housing.
All signal and timing
connections to and from the components are made to
jacks on the rear of the equipment housing. The
housing is provided with handles and cam studs for
fastening it to the equipment cart.
b. Equipment Cart EC-1/DAC-V (fig. 2)
b. Power, loop battery, and timing signals are
applied to the test pattern distortion generator through
the rear panel connector (P1, fig. 16). The test pattern
distortion generator output signal is available at a front
panel jack as well as through the rear panel connectors.
A switch on the rear panel allows selection of the relay
(mechanical or electronic) output signal to the front
panel jack. Operating controls are on the front panel.
12. Description of Power Supply
(figs. 17 and 18)
The power supply (fig. 17) is air-cooled by a
blower fan mounted in the front panel. Input and output
AGO 1969A
20
Figure 14. Test pattern distortion generator, front oblique view.
AGO 1969A
21
Figure 15. Test pattern distortion generator, right side view.
AGO 1969A
22
Figure 16. Test pattern distortion generator, rear view.
provides portability of the AN/GGM-2. The equipment
cart has alternating-current (ac) power outlets on the
front panel to provide power for the operation of
electrical tools and test equipment. Ac power circuit
breakers on the front panel of the equipment cart control
application of the input ac power to the five major
components of the AN/GGM-2 and the power outlets.
14. Additional Equipment Required
a. The time base generator is not supplied as part
of the AN/GGM-3, AN/GGM-4, and AN/GGM-5, but is
required for operation. The time base generator may be
located up to 1,000 feet from the AN/GMM-(*). One
time base generator can supply signals to a maximum
of 25 digital distortion analyzer or test pattern distortion
generators.
c. Shelf adapter 1A (figs. 1, 3, and 4) provides
interconnecting and rack mounting facilities for the
power supply, digital distortion analyzer, and the datascan scope of the AN/ GGM-1, AN/GGM-3, and
AN/GGM-4.
b. Although a Sigma 72 mechanical telegraph
relay is supplied with the AN/GGM(*), facilities are
included for the operation of an Automatic Electric 202
relay, which is not supplied.
d. Shelf
adapter
1B
(fig.
5)
provides
interconnecting and rack mounting facilities for the
power supply and the two digital distortion analyzers of
the AN/GGM-5.
c. If time studies of transmission characteristics
are to be made with the AN/GGM-(*), an appropriate
pen recorder is required.
15. Difference in Models
e. Shelf
adapter
2A
(fig.
1)
provides
interconnecting and rack mounting facilities for the time
base generator and the test pattern distortion generator
of the AN/GGM-1.
AN/GGM-1, AN/GGM-2, AN/GGM-3, AN/GGM-4,
and AN/GGM-5 are similar in function and basic
components. The differences are the number and type
of components included (par. 5a).
f. Shelf
adapters
2B
(fig.
3)
provides
interconnecting and rack mounting facilities for the test
pattern distortion generator of AN/GGM-3.
AGO 1969A
23
Figure 17. Power supply, front oblique view.
AGO 1969A
24
Figure 18. Power supply, rear view.
AGO 1969A
25
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
Note.
The AN/GGM-(*) should be installed by second echelon personnel.
Section I. SERVICE UPON RECEIPT OF EQUIPMENT
16. Unpacking
(fig. 19)
a. Packaging Data. When packed for shipment, the AN/GGM-(*) is placed in a corrugated carton and packed in a
wooden packing case. The dimensions and contents of the wooden packing case for each AN/GGM-(*) are listed in the
following chart.
Equipment set
AN/GGM-1
AN/GGM-2 (box 1 of 2)
AN/GGM-2 (box 2 of 2)
AN/GGM-3
AN/GGM-4
AN/GGM-5
Height
(in.)
Depth
(in.)
Width
(in.)
(Volume)
(cu ft)
Unit weight
(lb)
25
28
38
25
13
13
27
29
31
27
27
27
23
25
28
23
23
23
8 1/4
9
18
8 1/4
4 1/2
4 1/2
120
140
35
110
70
53
b. Removing Contents.
(1) Cut and fold back the metal bands.
(6) Remove the component.
(2) Remove the nails from the wooden cover
with a nail-puller, and remove the wooden
cover. Do not attempt to pry the wooden
cover from the wooden packing case;
prying may damage the equipment.
17. Checking Unpacked Equipment
a. Inspect the equipment for damage incurred
during shipment. If the equipment has been damaged,
refer to paragraph 2.
(3) Remove the envelope containing the
technical manuals.
(4) Open the moisture-proof paper
remove the corrugated carton.
b. Check the equipment against the packing list.
When no packing list accompanies the equipment, use
the table of components (par. 5) and the packaging data
(par. 16a) as a general check.
and
(5) Open the corrugated carton and remove
the corrugated cardboard cover, the
carton containing the spare parts, and the
corner supports.
AGO 1969A
26
Figure 19. Typical packaging diagram.
AGO 1969A
27
Section II. INSTALLATION OF TEST SET, TELETYPEWRITER AN/GGM-(*)
18. General
Paragraphs containing information applicable to the installation of each AN/GGM-(*) are listed in the chart below.
Equipment
AN/GGM-1..........................
AN/GGM-2..........................
AN/GGM-3..........................
AN/GGM-4..........................
AN/GGM-5..........................
Paragraphs
19, 20a, 21, 22, 23a, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30
19, 20b, 21, 22, 23b, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30
19, 20a, 21, 22, 23a, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30
19, 20a, 23a, 24, 25, 29, 30
19, 20a, 23a, 24, 26, 29, 30
19. Tools, Test Equipment, and Materials Required
Required for installation of:
AN/GGM-2
AN/GGM-3
AN/GGM-4
X
X
--X
X
X
Item
AN/GGM-1
Multimeter TS-352/U .....................................
X
Voltmeter TS-443/U ......................................
X
Wiring Test Set TS-563A/FT .........................
X
Polar telegraph loop power supply (60 volts)
X
X
X
Loop current rheostat (0-2,500 ohms, 5 watts)
X
X
X
Tool Equipment TE-123 .................................
X
X
X
Nonlocking pushbutton switch (FSN 5039X
--X
238-6866)a.
a
Required only for remote reset applications of the digital distortion analyzer meter (par. 24).
20. Installation of Equipment
(figs. 1-5)
X
X
AN/GGM-5
X
X
X
X
(2) Position each shelf adapter in the relay
rack or cabinet and secure it with a panel
bolt in each retaining slot.
For the
AN/GGM-1 and AN/GGM-3, position shelf
adapter 1A directly above shelf adapter
2A or 2B, as appropriate.
The AN/GGM-1, AN/GGM-3, AN/GGM-4, or
AN/GGM-5 is installed in a standard 19-inch relay rack
or cabinet (a below); the AN/GGM-2 (b below) is
installed on an equipment cart (part of AN/GGM-2). The
AN/GGM-1 and AN/GGM-3 require approximately 20
inches of vertical rack space; the AN/GGM-4 and
AN/GGM-5, approximately 13 inches.
Note.
Shelf adapters 2A (fig. 21) and 2B
(fig.
23) are shipped with the
interunit harness jacks removed from
the rear panels. After a shelf adapter
2A or 2B is installed in the rack or
cabinet, remove the jack retaining
screws from the jack, position the
jack in the rear panel opening
provided, and replace and tighten the
retaining screws to secure the jack in
position.
a. Installation in Rack or Cabinet (fig. 1, 3, 4, or 5,
as appropriate).
(1) Remove each components from its shelf
adapter by loosening the chassis securing
knob at the bottom center of each front
panel and withdrawing the component.
Caution:
(3) Replace the components in the shelf
adapters. Secure each component by
tightening the front panel chassis securing
knob.
Do not install the AN/ GGM-(*)
directly above an equipment that
generates excessive heat. Excessive
heat will cause faulty operation of
the AN/GGM-(*) and may damage the
transistors.
AGO 1969A
28
Note.
22. Call Letters Programming Procedure
Program the call letters in the test
pattern distortion generator (par. 22)
for the AN/GGM-1, AN/GGM-2, and AN/
GGM-3 before replacing it in the shelf
adapter.
b. Installation of Equipment Housing on Equipment
Cart (fig. 2).
(1) Loosen the chassis securing knobs on the
digital distortion analyzer, time base
generator, test pattern distortion generator,
and data-scan scope and remove them from
the equipment housing. Open the rear door
on the equipment housing, loosen the
chassis securing knob on the power supply,
and remove the power supply from the
equipment housing.
(2) Lift the equipment housing by using the
handles on the sides and place it on the
equipment cart (fig. 2). Position the housing
so that the cam studs on the bottom insert
into the keyholes on the equipment cart.
(3) Press the equipment housing to the rear to
engage the cam studs in the keyhole slots
on the equipment cart.
(4) Replace the component in the equipment
housing and tighten the chassis securing
knobs.
21. Installation of Telegraph Relay
The AN/GGM-1, AN/GMM-2, and AN/GGC-3 are
shipped with a Sigma 72 mechanical telegraph relay
installed. If an Automatic Electric 202 relay is to be used,
install it in the relay option bracket as follows:
Note.
The relay option bracket for the
AN/GGM-3 is accessible at the rear of
shelf adapter 2B (fig. 23). Perform
only b, c, and e below for the AN/GGM3.
a. Loosen the chassis retaining knob at the bottom
center of the time base generator front panel. Withdraw
the time base generator from the shelf adapter.
b. Loosen the bracket retaining screws on the relay
option bracket (figs. 12 and 23). Move the bracket to
expose the 11-pin socket. Tighten the bracket retaining
screws.
c. Insert the relay into the socket and press firmly to
insure proper seating.
d. Replace the time base generator in the equipment
housing or shelf adapter and tighten the chassis securing
knob.
e. Adjust the relay bias (par. 30c).
29
Note.
The resistors removed from the test
pattern
distortion
generator
to
program call letters (a and b below)
should be tagged and stored for use
when call letters are changed, when
the equipment is packed for shipment
or storage, or when the equipment is
forwarded for higher echelon repair.
Caution:
A low wattage soldering iron (25
watts) must be used when replacing
the resistors on the printed circuit
assembly components.
Personnel skill in maintenance of printed circuit
assemblies must replace these resistors.
a. General. The test message of the test pattern
distortion generator contains provisions for the addition of
seven call letters (including letters and figures shift
characters) at the end of the message. The call letters
are programmed into the test pattern distortion generator
by removing selected resistors from printed circuit
assembly A17 (fig. 15). The program chart (b below) lists
the resistors that should be removed to cause any
specific characters to be generated. To use the program
chart, first locate the first character of the desired call
letters in the CHARACTER column of the chart and note
which resistor columns under CHARACTER 1 are
checked (X). Use figure 20 as a guide and locate these
resistors on printed circuit assembly A17; carefully clip
the resistor leads and remove the resistors from the
printed circuit card.
Program the remaining six
characters the same way, only use the applicable
CHARACTER columns. For example, if character A is to
be the first call letter, remove resistors R70 and R71 (fig.
20). If character Y is to be the second call letter, remove
resistors R75, R77, and R79.
Note.
If a lowercase character (number,
symbol, etc.) is included in the callletter
sequence,
preceded
and
followed by upper case characters,
the lowercase character program
must be preceded by a FIGS character
and followed by a LTRS character.
When a lowercase character is used,
in this manner, only five call letters
can be used.
Figure 20. Printed circuit assembly A17, call-letter program resistors.
AGO 1969A
30
b. Program Chart
31
.
measurements, connect a nonlocking pushbutton switch
(FSN 5930-238-6866), placed at the remote location, to
the METER RESET terminals on terminal board 1TB1.
d. Remote Indicator. If a pen recorder is to be
used with the AN/GGM-1, (fig. 21) connect the unit as
follows:
(1) If the pen drive input to the recorder is to
be a voltage proportional to the distortion
indicated by the digital distortion analyzer,
connect the recorder pen drive input
terminals to the EXT IND terminals on
terminal board 1TB1.
23. Input AC Power Connections
Warning:
Do not connect the equipment to the
ac power source until all rear panel
connections have been made.
a. The AN/GGM-1 (fig. 21), AN/GGM-3 (fig. 23),
AN/GGM-4 (fig. 24), and AN/GGM-5 (fig. 25) are
shipped with the power cord connected to the PWR
terminals of terminal board 1TB1.
b. The AN/GGM-2 (fig. 22) must be connected as
follows:
(1) Connect the 2-foot power jumper cord
(supplied with the AN/GGM-2) to
terminals: 13, 14, and 15 of terminal
board 3TB2 on the rear of the equipment
housing. Connect the green lead of the
power cord to terminal 14. Connect the
black and white leads to terminals 13 and
15, respectively.
(2) Connect the jumper cord plug into the
female power jack on the rear of the
equipment cart.
(3) Connect the female plug of the 6-foot
power cord (supplied with the AN/GGM-2)
into the male power plug located on the
rear of the equipment cart.
Note. For this operation, the input
resistance of the recorder must be at
least 10,000 ohms. Otherwise, the
calibration of the digital distortion
analyzer will be disturbed.
(2) If the pen drive input to the recorder is to
be a current proportional to the distortion
indicated by the digital distortion analyzer,
first remove the EXT M RES. resistor
from the rear pane of the digital distortion
analyzer (fig. 8) and measure the value of
the resistor with the TS352/U. Connect a
variable resistor in series with the input to
the pen recorder and adjust it until the
total resistance (variable resistor and the
recorder input resistance) equals the
value of the EXT M. RES. resistor
removed from the digital distortion
analyzer rear panel. Connect the recorder
input (in series with the variable resistor)
to the EXT IND terminals of terminal
board TB1 on the AN/GGM-1 rear panel.
24. Connection of Remote Controls and Indicators
a. General. The connection of remote controls and
indicators is optional but does not apply to the AN/GGM2. Perform the procedures in b, c, and d below, as
required, for the AN/GGM-1. Perform the procedures in
c and d below, as required, for the AN/GGM-3, AN/
GGM-4, and AN/GGM-5.
Note.
Note.
If the resistance of the variable
resistor and recorder is not adjusted
to equal the EXT M. RES. resistor,
the calibration of the digital
distortion analyzer will be disturbed.
Refer to figures 21, 23, 24, or 25, as
appropriate.
On figure 25, the
terminals marked UNIT A and UNIT B
apply to the left-hand and right-hand
digital
distortion
analyzer,
respectively, as viewed from the
front.
25.
b. Remote Time Base Generator Oscillator Alarm
Indicator.
If remote indication of the time base
generator oscillator failure is required, connect the
binding posts of Wiring Test Set TS-563A/FT (placed at
the remote location) to the TBG REMOTE ALARM
terminals of terminal board 1TB1.
Digital Distortion Analyzer Input Signal Loop
Connections
Warning:
Dangerous
voltages
exist
on
telegraph loops. Direct the station
supply battery power to the loop
circuits to open the loop before
c. Remote Meter Reset. If remote reset of thk
digital distortion analyzer meter is required during peak
AGO 1969A
32
Figure 21. Test Set, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-1, rear view with power supply and interunit harness removed.
AGO 1969A
33
Figure 22. Test Set, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-2, rear view of equipment housing.
AGO 1969A
34
If the data/telegraph input signal to the digital distortion
analyzer is high-impedance (shunting) polar, connect
the input loop as follows:
making the connections described in
a and b below.
(1) If rear panel connection is required,
connect the signal line to the HI Z INPUT
terminal on terminal board 1TB1 (terminal
3 of terminal board 3TB1 for the
AN/GGM-2). Connect the ground bus of
the polar signal equipment to the PWR
GRD terminal board 1TB1 (terminal 14 of
terminal board 3TB1 for the AN/GGM-2).
Input signals to the digital distortion analyzer
may be applied through either the digital distortion
analyzer front panel input jacks or the shelf adapter
(equipment housing) rear panel terminals. The rear
panel terminals may be used for connecting leads to a
switchboard or patch bay, thus facilitating connection of
the digital distortion analyzer to numerous signal loops
from a common switching point. The front panel input
jacks may then be used for temporary patching to loops
or equipment for testing and troubleshooting.
(2) If front panel connection is required,
connect the signal wire to the tip of a twoconductor phone plug. Connect the polar
equipment ground to the rear panel PWR
GRD terminal of terminal board 1TB1
(terminal 14 of terminal board 3TB1 for
the AN/ GGM-2). Insert the plug into the
HIGH Z INPUT jack on the digital
distortion analyzer front panel (fig. 26).
Notes.
1. When a loop signal is patched into the digital
distortion analyzer front panel input jacks, the traffic on
the loops connected to the corresponding rear panel
input terminals is not interrupted, but cannot be
analyzed.
2. Refer to figure 21, 22, 23, 24, or 25, as
appropriate. On figure 25, the terminals marked UNIT A
and UNIT B apply to the left-hand and right-hand digital
distortion analyzer, respectively, as viewed from the
front. Parenthetical references to terminals and terminal
boards in a and b below apply only to the AN/GGM-2.
26. Connection of Character Release Signal
Connection of the character release signal is
applicable only to the AN/GGM-1, AN/GGM-2, and
AN/GGM-3.
a. Low-Impedance (Current) Input Signals. If the
data/telegraph input signal to the digital distortion
analyzer is 20 or 60 milliampere (ma) neutral or 20 or 30
ma polar, connect the input loop as follows:
a. General. If the test pattern distortion generator
is to be used with synchronous equipment that requires
character inputs in response to a step signal, make the
appropriate connections in b or c below for the character
step control signal line. The step signal must be
negative and have an amplitude of from 30 to 60 volts.
(1) If rear panel connection is required,
connect the loop wires to the LOW Z
INPUT terminals on terminal board 1TB1
(to terminals 1 and 2 of terminal board
3TB1 for the AN/GGM-2).
b. Connection
AN/GGM-3.
Procedure
for
AN/GGM-1
and
(1) Connect the character step control signal
line to the CHAR REL STEP terminal on
terminal board 1TB1 (fig. 21 or 23, as
appropriate).
(2) If front panel connection is required,
connect the loop wires to a two-conductor
phone plug and insert the plug into the
LOW Z INPUT jack on the digital
distortion analyzer front panel (fig. 26).
The polarity of the leads connected to the
tip and sleeve of phone plug should
correspond to that of the leads connected
to the LOW Z INPUT S (sleeve) and T
(tip) terminals on the rear panel, if such
connections are made.
(2) Connect the step signal ground to the
PWR GRD terminal of terminal board
1TB1.
c. Connection Procedure for AN/GGM-2.
(1) Connect the character step control signal
line to terminal 17 of terminal board 3TB2
(fig. 22).
b. High-Impedance (Voltage) Input Signals.
AGO 1969A
35
Figure 23. Test Set, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-3, rear view with power supply and interunit harness removed.
AGO 1969A
36
Figure 24. Test Set, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-4, rear view with interunit harness removed.
AGO 1969A
37
Figure 25. Test Set, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-5, rear view with power supply and interunit harness removed.
AGO 1969A
38
Figure 26. Digital distortion analyzer, front panel.
AGO 1969A
39
(2) Connect the step signal ground
terminal 14 of terminal board 3TB2.
27.
(2) Connect a wire from the negative (-)
battery terminal to the MARK terminal of
terminal board 1TB2 (terminal 8 of
terminal board 3TB1 in the AN/GGM-2).
to
Connection of Test Pattern Distortion
Generator Output Signal Loops from AN/
GGM-1, AN/GGM-2, AN/GGM-3
(3) Connect a wire from the battery common
terminal (connected to station ground)
through a loop current rheostat to the
RELAY LOOP INPUT S terminal of
terminal board 1TB2 (terminal 12 of
terminal board 3TB1 in the AN/GGM-2).
The test pattern distortion generator output
signal is available at both the test pattern distortion
generator front panel SIGNAL OUTPUT jack (fig. 27)
and the shelf adapter equipment housing rear panel
terminals. The rear panel terminals may be used to
connect the signal to a switchboard or patch bay, to
facilitate routing the signal into numerous loops from a
common switching locations. The front panel SIGNAL
OUTPUT jack may then be used for temporary
connections for troubleshooting and testing. After the
loops are connected and the batteries installed (60-volt
batteries are required when operating with polar output
signal or with neutral output signal into loop not having
loop battery), the loop current must be adjusted. Make
the necessary connections to obtain the appropriate type
of output configuration as follows:
(4) Connect a jumper wire between the
RELAY LOOP INPUT T terminal and the
TONGUE terminal of terminal board 1TB2
(terminals 11 and 9 of terminal board
3TB1 in the AN/GGM3).
Note.
In the AN/GGM-1 and AN/GGM-3,
check to see that a jumper wire is
connected between the RELAY
DRIVE A and B terminals of terminal
board 1TB2. If the jumper wire has
been removed, it must be replaced.
Notes.
(5) Connect the output loop wires to the
MECH LOOP OUT T and S terminals of
terminal board 1TB1 (terminals 6 and 7 of
terminal board 3TB1 in the AN/GGM-2).
The polarity of the T (6) and S (7)
terminals corresponds to the polarity of
the tip, T (6) and sleeve, S (7)
connections of the test pattern distortion
generator front panel SIGNAL OUTPUT
jack.
1. When a phone plug is inserted into the front
panel SIGNAL OUTPUT jack on the test pattern
distortion generator (fig. 27), the corresponding rear
panel loop (mechanical or electronic loop, as selected
by the rear panel JACK SIGNAL SELECTOR switch) is
disabled.
2. Parenthetical references in a through f below
are to terminal and terminal board numbers of the
AN/GGM-2 (fig. 22) which differ from those of the
AN/GGM-1 (fig. 21) and AN/GGM-3 (fig. 23).
(6) If the output signal is to be connected
from the front panel jack, connect the loop
wired to a two-conductor phone plug and
insert the plug into the test pattern
distortion generator SIGNAL OUTPUT
jack.
Operate the rear panel JACK
SIGNAL SELECTOR switch to MECH.
Caution:
Be extremely careful that you are
connecting to the proper terminals.
Be careful also that the loop batteries
connected to the electronic relay
loop do not exceed 60 volts for polar
operation or 130 volts for neutral
operation. Damage to the equipment
will result if these precautions are
not observed.
(7) Adjust the loop current (par. 30b).
b. Connection of Mechanical Relay Loop for DryContact Neutral Operation. Connect the test pattern
distortion generator output for dry-contact (relay
closures) neutral keying from the mechanical relay into
a loop having battery supplied by another station as
follows:
a. Connection of Mechanical Relay Loop for Polar
Operation. Connect the test pattern distortion generator
output for a polar signal from the mechanical telegraph
relay as follows:
(1) Connect a jumper wire between the
MARK and RELAY LOOP INPUT T
(1) Connect a wire from the positive (+)
battery terminal to the SPACE terminal of
terminal board 1TB2 (terminal 10 of
terminal board 3TB1 in the AN/GGM-2
AGO 1969A
40
Figure 27. Test pattern distortion generator, front panel.
panel jack, connect the loop wires to a
two-conductor phone plug and insert the
plug into the test pattern distortion
generator
SIGNAL
OUTPUT
jack.
Operate the rear panel JACK SIGNAL
SELECTOR to MECH.
terminals of terminal board 1TB2
(terminals 8 and 11 of terminal board
3TB1 in the AN/GGM-2).
(2) Connect a jumper wire between the
TONGUE and RELAY LOOP INPUT S
terminals of terminal board 1TB2
(terminals 9 and 12 of terminal board
3TB1 in the AN/GGM-2).
(4) Operate the test pattern distortion
generator CHARACTER RELEASE switch
(fig. 27) to STEADY MARK and notify the
station supplying battery to adjust the loop
current to the required value.
Note.
In the AN/GGM-1 and AN/GGM-3,
check to see that a jumper wire is
connected between the RELAY
DRIVE A and B terminals of terminal
board 1TB2. If the jumper wire has
been removed, it must be replaced.
c. Connection of Mechanical Relay Loop for
Neutral Operation With Locally Supplied Loop Battery.
Connect the test pattern distortion generator output for a
neutral signal from the mechanical relay with loop
battery applied locally to the AN/GGM-1, AN/GGM-2, or
AN/ GGM-3 as follows:
(3) Connect the loop wires to the MECH
LOOP OUT terminals of terminal board
1TB1 (terminals 6 and 7 of terminal board
3TB1 in the AN/GGM-2). If the output
signal is to be connected from the front
(1) Connect a wire from the positive (+)
battery terminal to the MARK terminal
AGO 1969A
41
the ELECT LOOP + BATT terminal of
terminal board 1TB1 (terminal 18 of
terminal board 3TB2 in the AN/GGM-2).
of terminal board 1TB2 (terminal 8 of
terminal board 3TB1 in the AN/ GGM-2).
(2) Connect a wire from the negative (-)
battery terminal through a loop current
rheostat to the RELAY LOOP INPUT S
terminal of terminal board 1TB2 (terminal
12 of
terminal board 3TB1 in the
AN/GGM-2).
(3) Connect a jumper wire between the
RELAY LOOP INPUT T and TONGUE
terminals of terminal board 1TB2
(terminals 11 and 9 of terminal board
3TB1 in the AN/GGM-1).
Note.
(2) Connect the wire from the negative (-)
battery (60 volts maximum) terminal to
the ELECT LOOP-BATT terminal of
terminal board 1TB1 (terminal 20 of
terminal board 3TB2 in the AN/GGM-2).
(3) Connect the wire from the battery
common terminal (connected to station
ground) through a loop current rheostat to
the ELECT LOOP COMMON terminal of
terminal board 1TB1 (terminal 19 of
terminal board 3TB2 in the AN/GGM-2).
In the AN/GGM-1 and AN/GGM3,
check to see that a jumper wire is
connected between the RELAY
DRIVE A and B terminals of terminal
board 1TB2. If the jumper wire has
been removed, it must be replaced.
(4) Connect the output loop wires to the
ELECT LOOP OUT terminals of terminal
board 1TB1 (terminals 4 and 5 of terminal
board 3TB1 in the AN/GGM-2). The
polarity of the T and S terminals which are
negative and positive, respectively, in
mark condition, corresponds to the tip, T
(4) and sleeve S (5) connection of the test
pattern distortion generator front panel
SIGNAL OUTPUT jack. If the output
signal is to be connected from the front
panel jack, connect the loop wires to a
two-conductor phone plug and insert the
plug into the test pattern distortion
generator
SIGNAL
OUTPUT
jack.
Operate the rear panel JACK SIGNAL
SELECTOR switch to ELECT or to
ELECT (MECH OFF), as desired.
(4) Do not make any connection to the
battery common terminal.
(5) Connect the output loop wires to the
MECH LOOP OUT terminals of terminal
board 1TB1 (terminals 6 and 7 of terminal
board 3TB1 in the AN/GGM-2). The
polarity of the T (6) and S (7) terminals
which are positive and negative,
respectively, corresponds to the polarity
of the tip, T (6) and sleeve S (7)
connections of the test pattern distortion
generator front panel SIGNAL OUTPUT
jack.
If the output signal is to be
connected from the front panel jack,
connect the loop wires to a two-conductor
phone plug and insert the plug into the
test pattern distortion generator SIGNAL
OUTPUT jack. Operate the rear panel
JACK SIGNAL SELECTOR switch to
MECH.
(5) Adjust the loop current (par. 30b).
e. Connection of Electronic Relay Loop for DryContact Neutral Operation. Connect the test pattern
distortion generator output for dry-contact (electronic
relay closures) neutral keying from the electronic relay
into a loop with a battery (120 volts maximum) supplied
by another station as follows:
(6) Adjust the loop current (par. 30b).
d. Connection of Electronic Relay Loop for Polar
Operation. Connect the test pattern distortion generator
output for a polar signal from the electronic telegraph
relay as follows:
(1) Connect a jumper wire between the
ELECT LOOP-BATT and ELECT LOOP
COMMON terminals on terminal board
1TB1 (terminals 19 and 20 on terminal
board 3TB2 in the AN/ GGM-2).
(1) Connect the wire from the positive (+)
battery (60 volts maximum) terminal to
AGO 1969A
42
terminals corresponds to the polarity of
the tip (T) and sleeve (S) connections of
the test pattern distortion generator front
panel SIGNAL OUTPUT jack. If the
output signal is to be connected from the
front panel jack, connect the loop wires to
a two-conductor phone plug and insert the
plug into the test pattern distortion
generator
SIGNAL
OUTPUT
jack.
Operate the rear panel JACK SIGNAL
SELECTOR switch to ELECT or to
ELECT (MECH OFF), as desired.
(2) Connect the negative loop wire to the
ELECT LOOP OUT S terminal of terminal
board 1TB1 (terminal 5 of terminal board
3TB1 in the AN/GGM-2). Connect the
positive loop wire to the ELECT LOOP
OUT T terminal of terminal board 1TB1
(terminal 4 of terminal board 3TB1 in the
AN/GGM-2).
(3) If the output signal is to be connected
from the front panel SIGNAL OUTPUT
jack, connect the loop wires to a twoconductor phone plug; connect the
negative loop wire to the plug sleeve and
the positive loop wire to the plug tip.
Operate the rear panel JACK SIGNAL
SELECTOR switch to ELECT or to
ELECT (MECH OFF), as desired.
(5) Adjust the loop current (par. 30b).
28.
Connection of Timing Signals from AN/GGM-1
and AN/GGM-2
(figs. 21 and 23)
a. If timing signals from time base generator in the
AN/GGM-1 or AN/GGM-2 are to be applied to other sets
of the AN/GGM-(*), remove the terminating caps from
the coaxial cable receptacles on the rear panel.
Connect cables from the AN/GGM-(*) receiving the
timing signals to the appropriate coaxial connector on
the AN/GGM-1 or AN/GGM-2.
(4) Operate the test pattern distortion
generator CHARACTER RELEASE switch
(fig. 27) to STEADY MARK and notify the
station supplying battery to adjust the loop
current to the required value.
f. Connection of Electronic Relay Loop for Neutral
Operation with Locally Supplied Loop Battery. Connect
the test pattern distortion generator output for a neutral
signal from the electronic relay with loop battery (120
volts maximum) supplied locally to the AN/GGM-1,
AN/GGM-2, or AN/GGM-3 as follows:
b. If timing signals from time base generator are
not to be applied to other AN/GGM-(*)'s, make sure that
the terminating caps are in place on the coaxial cable
receptacles on the rear of the AN/GGM-1 and AN/GGM2.
(1) Connect a wire from the positive (+)
battery terminal to the ELECT LOOP
COMMON terminal of terminal board
1TB1 (terminal 19 of terminal board 3TB2
in the AN/GGM-2).
29.
Connection of External Timing Signal to
AN/GGM-3, AN/GGM-4, and AN/ GGM-5
The AN/GGM-3, AN/GGM-4, and AN/GGM-5 do
not contain a time base generator and thus require an
input timing signal from a remote AN/GGM-1 or
AN/GGM-2. The input timing signal may be applied
from the AN/ GGM-1 or AN/GGM-2 either directly or
indirectly (through another AN/GGM-3, AN/ GGM-4, or
AN/GGM-5).
Refer to figure 23, 24, or 25, as
appropriate, and perform the procedures in a through h
below, as required.
a. Measure the distance to the AN/GGM-(*)
applying or relaying the timing signal; the total distance
between all AN/GGM-(*)'s must not exceed 1,000 feet.
(2) Connect a wire from the negative (-)
battery terminal through a loop current
rheostat to the ELECT LOOP-BATT
terminal of terminal board 1TB1 (terminal
20 of terminal board 3TB2 in the
AN/GGM-2).
(3) Do not make any connection to the
battery common terminal.
(4) Connect the output loop wires to the
ELECT LOOP OUT terminals of terminal
board 1TB1. The polarity of the T and S
AGO 1969A
43
on the TS-443/U and the power supply
GRD jack.
b. Measure and cut seven pieces of coaxial cable
(Radio Frequency Cable RG-62A/U); the length of each
piece is determined by the distance measured in a
above.
(4) Adjust the +16 V ADJ control on the
power supply until the meter indicates 15
volts. Disconnect the meter leads and
tighten the locknut.
c. Assemble a Plug UG-206/U on each end of
each coaxial cable. Figure 28 illustrates the procedure
for assembling the plug on the cable.
(5) Connect one meter lead between the 15
terminal in the TS-443/U and the power
supply -15 jack. Connect the other meter
lead between the + terminal on the TS443/U and the power supply GRD jack.
d. Remove the terminating caps from the coaxial
cable receptables on the rear of each AN/GGM-(*).
e. Connect
the
coaxial
cables
between
corresponding baud rate coaxial cable receptacles on
the AN/GGM-(*) applying the timing signal and the
AN/GGM-(*) receiving the timing signal.
(6) Adjust the -15 V ADJ control until the
meter indicates 15 volts. Tighten the
locknut and remove the meter leads.
f. If the timing signal is to be applied from your
AN/GGM-3, AN/GGM-4, or AN/GGM-5 to a like
equipment, connect coaxial cables (a, b, and c above)
between corresponding baud rate coaxial cable
receptacles.
(7) Connect one meter lead between the 150
terminal on the TS-443/U and the power
supply -120 jack. Connect the other
meter lead from the + terminal on the TS443/U to the power supply GRD jack. The
meter should indicate 120 volts.
Disconnect the meter leads.
g. Make sure that terminating caps are replaced on
all unused baud rate coaxial cable receptacles on the
AN/GGM-(*)'s.
(8) Connect one lead of the meter between
the 150 terminal on the TS-443/U and
power supply GRD jack. Connect the
other meter lead between the + terminal
on the TS-443/U and the power supply
+21 jack. The meter should indicate 21
volts. Disconnect the meter leads.
h. Do not make connections to the EXT jack.
30. Initial Adjustment of Equipment
Note.
The procedure in a below applies to
the AN/GGM-1 through AN/GGM-5; b
and c below apply only to the
AN/GGM-1, AN/GGM-2, and AN/GGM3.
b. Loop Current Adjustments.
When the test
pattern distortion generator output signal loop
connections are changed, check and adjust the loop
current as follows:
(1) Arrange the TS-352/U to measure current
and insert the meter in series with the
loop. If the loop is polar, connect the
meter in the battery common leg. If the
loop is neutral, insert the meter into either
leg of the loop.
a. Power Supply Output Voltages (fig. 29). The
power supply output voltages must be adjusted prior to
normal operation of the AN/GGM-(*) as follows:
(1) For the AN/GGM-2, hinged door on the
rear of the equipment housing. For the
other AN/GGM-(*)'s, the power supply is
directly accessible at the rear of the
equipment rack or cabinet.
(2) Place the test pattern distortion generator
CHARACTER RELEASE switch (fig. 27)
to STEADY MARK and adjust the
applicable loop current rheostat until the
meter indicates the correct value (20, 30,
or 60 ma).
(2) Loosen the locknuts on the +15 V ADJ
and the -15 V ADJ controls and set both
controls to the extreme counterclockwise
position.
(3) Disconnect the meter and reconnect the
loop wires.
(3) Connect one meter lead between the +
terminal on the TS-443/U and the +15
jack on the power supply. Connect the
other meter lead between the 15 terminal
c. Mechanical Relay Bias Adjustment. Whenever
the AN/GGM-1, AN/GGM-2 or AN/
AGO 1969A
44
Figure 28. Assembly procedures for time base generator coaxial cables.
AGO 1969A
45
Figure 29. Power supply, front panel.
GGM-3 initially installed or anytime the mechanical
relay is changed or the operation of mechanical relay is
changed (polar or neutral or vice-versa), adjust the bias
for the mechanical relay as follows:
operation, connect the test pattern
distortion generator output and batteries
to produce a neutral signal output from
the relay to the front panel SIGNAL
OUTPUT jack (par. 27c).
(1) If the mechanical relay is to be adjusted
for polar operation, connect the test
pattern distortion generator output and
batteries to produce a polar signal output
from the mechanical relay to the front
panel SIGNAL OUT PUT jack (par. 27a).
If the relay is to be adjusted for neutral
(2) Arrange the test pattern distortion
generator to produce zero distortion
reversals output signal (par. 43).
(3) Connect a two-conductor patch cord
AGO 1969A
46
between the test pattern distortion
generator SIGNAL OUTPUT jack (fig. 27)
and the digital distortion analyzer LOW Z
INPUT jack (fig. 26).
(9) Loosen the locknut on the RELAY BIAS
ADJ control. Carefully observe the digital
distortion analyzer indications and adjust
the control until the digital distortion
analyzer indicates zero distortion and the
EARLY and LATE lamps on the digital
distortion analyzer light alternately.
Tighten the locknut.
(4) Operate the digital distortion analyzer
INPUT SELECT switch to the position
corresponding to the input signal selected
in (1) above and (5) below.
(10) Remove the extension cable and replace
the time base generator in the shelf
adapter ((7) above) or replace the blank
panel ((8) above), as required.
(5) Adjust the loop current to 30 ma if output
signal is polar or 60 ma if the output
signal is neutral; follow the procedure in b
above.
(11) Rearrange the test pattern distortion
generator output and battery connections
for the desired output configuration.
(6) Arrange the digital distortion analyzer to
measure bias distortion of all transitions
(par. 41).
Note.
Perform either (7) below (for the
AN/GGM-1 and AN/GGM-2) or (8)
below (for the AN/GGM-3), as
required.
(7) Remove the time base generator of the
AN/GGM-1 or AN/GGM-2 from the shelf
adapter and connect the 32-conductor
extension cable (supplied with equipment)
between the time base generator plug and
the shelf adapter jack to allow the time
base generator to be operated out of the
shelf adapter. Locate the RELAY BIAS
ADJ control on the rear of the relay
assembly (fig. 30) on the time base
generator (fig. 12).
(8) Remove the blank panel from the front of
the AN/GGM-3 and locate the RELAY
BIAS ADJ control on the rear of the relay
assembly (fig. 30) at the rear of the shelf
adapter.
Figure 30. Test pattern distortion generator
mechanical relay subassembly, rear view.
AGO 1969A
47
CHAPTER 3
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Section I. FUNDAMENTALS OF START-STOP AND SYNCHRONOUS TELEGRAPHY AND
DISTORTION MEASUREMENT TECHNIQUES OF AN/GGM-(*)
normally a mark, to notify the receiving equipment of
the end of the character. Although start-stop codes exist
which contain a different number of information bits and
different types of stop signals, one of the more common
is illustrated in figure 31, line A, containing a start signal
(start-space), five information bits, and a stop signal
(stop-mark) in the form of a mark having a time duration
of 1.42 times the time duration of the information bits.
This particular code is called 7.42 unit code, derived
from the total of the start-space (1 bit), the information
bits (5 bits), and the stop-mark (1.42 bits). The 7.42 unit
code will be used throughout this section as the example
of a start-stop code.
31. General
a. To obtain maximum utilization and flexibility of
the AN/GGM-(*), the operator of the equipment must
have a general understanding of the basic principles of
synchronous telegraphy, some of the relative
advantages and disadvantages of synchronous
telegraphy as compared to conventional start-stop
signaling, and the basis by which telegraph distortion
measurements are made with the digital distortion
analyzer of the AN/GGM-(*).
b. Although it is assumed that the reader is familiar
with the conventional start-stop telegraph systems, a
review of the fundamentals of start-stop telegraphy with
special attention being given to certain specific features
may well illustrate the more important features of a
synchronous system. For a more detailed review of the
fundamentals of start-stop telegraphy, refer to TM 11655.
b. When the receiving station equipment receives
a start space, it begins to measure time to determine the
beginning and end of each bit within the character being
received. If an error exists between the timing of the
receiving and transmitting equipment, the timing error
will accumulate only over a period of one character
since each character is a separate semi-unrelated
event. For example, if a 1-percent error exists in the bit
timing of the two stations (sending and receiving) the
start-space will end with a 1-percent error between the
equipments; the first information bit will end with a 2percent error; the second, 3-percent; the third, 4
percent; the fourth, 5-percent; the last information bit
(prior to the beginning of the stopmark) ends with an
accumulated timing error of 6 percent. However, since
the station equipments begin the next character timing
in synchronism, the timing error in start-stop telegraphy
can accumulate only to a magnitude equal to the basic
timing error multiplied by the number of bits in one
character. Thus, the timing requirements for most startstop systems are comparatively noncritical and the need
for highly stabilized timing devices does not ordinarily
exist.
c. The purpose of this section is not to illustrate an
actual synchronous system, but rather, to explain some
of the basic requirements of such a system. Throughout
this section, actual processing of synchronous data is
discussed only in general terms, and the greater detail is
devoted to synchronous telegraph principles and system
requirements.
32. Start-Stop Telegraphy
a. The code used in start-stop telegraphy consists
of a start signal, normally a space, to notify the
receiving equipment of the start of the character; a
series of information bits that convey a part of the
message data to the receiving station; and a stop signal,
AGO 1969A
48
Figure 31. Data/telegraph signal and timing waveforms.
one-third being the start and stop signals), the actual
information data rate is only 50 bits per second. If the
same installation were transmitting signals containing
only information data, approximately 25 bits per second
more information data could be transmitted, increasing
the
c. The use of the start-space and stop-mark in
start-stop telegraphy reduces the need for very accurate
timing devices, but it also decreases the efficiency of
the system. For example, assume that a start-stop
system is capable of transmitting data at 75 bits per
second. Since only approximately two-thirds of each
character is actual message information (the remaining
AGO 1969A
49
efficiency of the system by 50 percent.
b. Assuming that the receiving equipment aware of
the exact starting time of a character the matter of
determining the start of each bit therein and each
character thereafter is simply a matter of measuring
time from the assumed correct start. Since it has been
stated that the timing device that controls the transmitter
is very accurate, the receiving equipment must therefore
look for the start of each bit within a period of
comparatively small duration.
d. One of the most important disadvantages of
start-stop telegraphy is shown in figure 31, line B, which
illustrates a typical 7.42 startstop code character in
which the start-space has been mutilated. Upon receipt
of this signal, the receiving equipment would probably
interpret the start-space and first information bit as a
continuation of the stop-mark and the second
information bit as the start-space. The character would
thus be incorrectly decoded and, of even greater
importance, the timing of the receiving equipment would
be such that the character timing would end during the
start-space of the following character. The receiving
equipment would then interpret the first information bit
of the second character as the stopmark of the first
character and thus, the second character would also be
incorrectly decoded. The erroneous print-out would
continue until the receiving equipment happened to lock
on to the correct stop-mark. Thus, a single distorted
character may result in a multitude of erroneously
decoded characters in the startstop signaling system.
c. The primary consideration of the timing of a
synchronous system is not to have the transmitter and
receiver operating at a particular frequency, but rather in
phase synchronism; therefore, the small corrections
necessary to maintain the synchronism may be made by
making a continuous comparison of the incoming signal
rate with that of the local receiver timing device and
using a correction network to shift the local timing
device to maintain synchronism. The phase-frequency
comparison is made by circuitry which compares the
time position of the incoming signal transitions
(transitions from mark condition to space condition or
vice versa) to that of the local timing device. The
incoming signal transitions will always have one of three
time relationships with the local signal: early or before
the corresponding local signal transition; in phase with
the local signal; late or after the corresponding local
signal transition. If the comparison reveals the incoming
signal phase to be early with respect to the local signal,
the frequency of the local timer is increased. If the
incoming transitions are late with respect to the local
signal, the frequency of the local timer is decreased.
Note that it has been assumed thus far in this discussion
that any displacement of the incoming signal transition
is due to a timing error: This assumption, however, is
not necessarily true, because the incoming signal
transitions may also be apparently displaced by other
effects which were assumed to be nonexistent in the
discussions thus far.
33. Synchronous Telegraphy
a. Unlike start-stop telegraphy, synchronous
telegraphy does not employ start and stop signals;
instead, the data in a synchronous transmission system
is sent in a continuous serial stream. Therefore, the
sending and receiving stations must utilize highly
stabilized timing devices to prevent the accumulation of
timing errors. If, for example, a bit timing error of 1
percent existed between the bit timing of the
transmitting and receiving equipment and the equipment
were assumed to start with a zero timing difference, the
timing error would not be erased at the end of each
character (as was the error in the start-stop system) but
instead, would continue to accumulate until, after only
30 to 40 bits, the receiving equipment would begin to
print out erroneously. Thus, the need for a very
accurate timing signal at both the transmitting and
receiving stations is apparent.
This requirement,
however, is comparatively simple to fulfill as present
state-of-the-art techniques provide timing devices
accurate to within 1 part in 10 million.
d. The determination of the correct time position of
an incoming signal transition can be made by the
receiving equipment only if it is aware of the correct
time position of the transition to which the time
measurement is referenced. For example, if the timing
AGO 1969A
50
displacement of the input signal transitions from their
correct time position. In startstop telegraph distortion
measurements, the stop-mark to start-space transition is
normally used as a reference on which the
measurements are based.
When measuring the
distortion of synchronous telegraph signals, the
AN/GGM(*) digital distortion analyzer averages the time
position of all mark-to-space transitions and this average
time position is used as the reference for the
measurements. In addition to specifying the reference,
distortion measurements specify the magnitude of the
transition displacement (normally expressed as the
percent of the transition displacement to the normal bit
time duration), the affected transitions (mark-space or
space-mark transitions of the first bit, second bit, etc.)
and the sign of the displacement (early or late in respect
to the zero-distortion time position).
is initiated by an uncertain transition (disturbed by noise
or other random effects), the timing is therefore
uncertain and the determination of the correct position
of the following transition is not more than an uncertain
estimate. To resolve the uncertainty caused by random
disturbances, the receiving equipment must integrate
the output of comparison circuits. The integration of the
signal resolves the uncertainty by averaging the effect
of the noise (noise being used to describe all random
disturbances).
If noise is integrated over a
comparatively long time period, its net effect is
approximately zero and the output of the comparison
circuits represents the average or most correct
relationship of the transmitter and receiver timing signal.
e. When there is no information to be transmitted
in start-stop telegraphy, the transmitter produces a
steady mark signal. When a message begins, the first
bit of the message is identified to the receiver by the
first mark-to-space transition.
In synchronous
telegraphy, however, the receiver often requires input
signal transitions to maintain the correct timing
relationship. If steady mark or space were used when
no information was being sent, the receiver and
transmitter timing signals would gradually drift apart;
therefore, a special idle character is normally required to
maintain the timing during no-information periods.
b. Since the mark-to-space transitions are used as
a timing reference, a constant displacement of the
mark-to-space transitions is interpreted by the digital
distortion analyzer to be a timing phase error and is
erased by the digital distortion analyzer integrating to
the new time position. Thus, bias distortion, which is
usually constant in sign and magnitude for any given
bias condition, is always indicated by the digital
distortion analyzer to be a displacement of the space-tomark transition. For example, if the signal shown in line
F, figure 31, should be instantaneously displaced to the
condition shown in line G, the digital distortion analyzer
would, at first, sense a late mark-to-space condition of
approximately 20 percent in relation to the reference
(line H). However, after the new timing phase is
adopted through the digital distortion analyzer's
integration process, the space-to-mark transitions would
appear to be 20 percent early in relation to the new
timing reference (line I) and the digital distortion
analyzer would indicate such.
f. Line C, figure 31, illustrates the immunity of the
synchronous telegraph system to multiple errors from a
single bit error. If the first bit of character B should be
disturbed to the degree that the receiver interprets the
mark as a space, the character would be incorrectly
decoded but the error in character B would not cause an
error in the following character C because the receiver
bit and character timing (line D and line E) are not solely
dependent on the occurrence of any transition in
character B to enable it to forecast the start of character
C. Thus, in contrast to start-stop telegraphy, a single
distorted character does not normally cause other
characters to be incorrectly decoded by the receiving
equipment.
34.
c. The digital distortion analyzer measures
distortion of the complete input signal character or any
segment of the input character by electronically dividing
the time period of the input character into equal one-bit
character segments, each of which extends from onehalf bit before to one-half bit after the zero-distortion
Techniques of Distortion Measurement by
AN/GGM-(*)
a. Telegraph distortion may be defined as the time
AGO 1969A
51
numbered positions, any specific character segment
may be analyzed by use of the distortion select options
described above.
Lines D, E, and F, figure 32,
respectively, illustrate the measurement of average,
total peak, early peak, and late peak distortion of the
first character segment (selected by operation of the
right-hand TRANSITION SELECT switch to 1, the lefthand TRANSITION SELECT switch to SPACE/MARK,
and the DISTORTION SELECT switch to TOTAL PEAK,
AVG, EARLY PEAK, and LATE PEAK, respectively).
time position of the input signal transitions. Each
character segment is further divided electronically into
128 equal parts, 64 before the zero-distortion transition
time position (each representing approximately 4/5 of 1
percent distortion) and 64 after. If the incoming signal
transition occurs before the zero-distortion time position,
it falls into the early analysis period; if the transition
occurs after the zero-distortion time position, it falls into
the late analysis period. The relationship of an input
signal character and the analysis periods for various
types of measurements is illustrated in figure 32. Note
that the signal shown is undistorted and, with this
condition, the transitions are positioned to occur exactly
in the middle of each character segment (line A, fig. 32),
and any displacement of the transitions will cause them
to occur in the early or late regions marked E and L
respectively.
If the digital distortion analyzer
DISTORTION SELECT switch is operated to TOTAL
PEAK or AVG and the right-hand TRANSITION
SELECT switch is operated to ALL; and the left-hand
TRANSITION SELECT switch is operated to either
MARK/SPACE or SPACE/MARK, the complete input
signal character is analyzed as illustrated in line A. This
particular
switch
configuration
facilitates
the
measurement of the total peak (maximum) or average
displacement of the input signal transitions. With the
afore-mentioned switches set to AVG, ALL, and
SPACE/MARK respectively, the bias distortion of the
input signal may be measured. When measuring bias
distortion, if the space-to-mark transitions fall in the
early areas, the digital distortion analyzer EARLY
indicator lamp lights and marking bias is indicated. If
the space-to-mark transitions occur in the late zones,
the LATE indicator lamp on the digital distortion
analyzer lights and spacing bias is indicated. With the
right-hand TRANSITION SELECT switch operated to
ALL and the DISTORTION SELECT switch operated to
EARLY PEAK, only the half-bit analysis periods
preceding the zero-distortion points are active (line B).
With the DISTORTION SELECT switch operated to
LATE PEAK, only the half-bit analysis periods following
the zero-distortion points are active (line C). When the
right-hand TRANSITION SELECT switch operated to the
d. Figures 40 through 43 and 51 and 52 provide a
graphic illustration of the techniques of distortion
analysis which may be made with the AN/GGM-(*).
Figures 40 through 43 illustrate the analysis periods of
the digital distortion analyzer for various switch
configurations. The selection points (points at which the
receiving telegraph equipment senses the input signal to
determine if it is a mark or space) are marked on each
drawing. Figures 51 and 52 illustrate typical waveforms
with various distortion conditions. When a specific wave
form (figs. 51 and 52) is placed over one of thk analysis
periods (figs. 40-43) and the stopmark to start-space
transition of the waveform is aligned with the S-register
mark to the left of the analysis period, it is then evident
how the digital distortion analyzer will react to the
particular input signal. By experimenting with the
waveforms and the various analysis options, the
equipment operator may readily learn which analysis
option is better suited for any particular distortion
condition. For example, when the waveform shown in
line B, figure 51, is placed over the analysis option in
line C, figure 40, it is evident that the digital distortion
analyzer will indicate zero-distortion although the
waveform contains 25 percent marking bias. Thus, it is
important that the operator of the AN/GGM-(*)
understand the technique of measurement used by the
digital distortion analyzer. Using the scale of the
waveforms in figures 51 and 52, the user may draw
additional waveforms on thin tracing paper and, by using
the waveforms with the analysis figures, thus obtain
additional training. When using the waveforms and
analysis figures, the following rules
AGO 1969A
52
must always be observed to insure correct results:
(2) If a transition falls within the area marked
E, it is early; if it falls within the area
marked L, it is distorted late.
(1) Always align the stop-mark to start-space
transition on the waveform with the Sregister line to the left of the analysis
period in use.
(3) When the AVG, EARLY PEAK, or LATE
PEAK analysis options are used, only the
mark-to-space or the space-to-mark
transitions are analyzed at any specific
time, according
Figure 32. Relationship of input signal and digital distortion analyzer analysis periods.
AGO 1969A
53
to the position of the left-hand
TRANSITION SELECT switch.
(4) When the TOTAL PEAK, EARLY PEAK,
or LATE PEAK analysis options are used,
the digital distortion analyzer meter
indicates the maximum distortion that is
detected.
(5) When a transition does not fall within any
analysis period of a given switch
configuration, it indicates that the digital
distortion analyzer would not sense that
specific transition.
Section II. OPERATOR'S CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND JACKS
35. Digital Distortion Analyzer
(fig. 26)
Control, indicator or jack
POWER indicator lamp ....................
SIGNAL indicator lamp ....................
EARLY indicator lamp ......................
LATE indicator lamp ........................
PERCENT DISTORTION meter.
INPUT POLARITY switch (2-posi- .....
tion toggle sw).
INPUT SELECT switch (4-position
rotary sw).
Function
Lights when dc power is applied from the power supply.
Lights when input signal is in marking condition.
Lights to indicate that the time position of the signal transition being measured is early in relation to that of the reference timing signal.
Lights to indicate that the time position of the signal transition being measured is late in relation to that of the reference timing signal.
Indicates, in percent, the magnitude of the input signal distortion
Reverses the polarity of the input signal connection.
Arranges the digital distortion analyzer to accept various input signals.
Sw pos
Action
Arranges for 20-ma neutral input signals.
Arranges input circuits for 60-ma neutral input signals.
POLAR, 20 OR 30MA
Arranges input circuits for 20-ma or 30-ma
polar input signals.
POLAR, HIGH
Arranges input circuits for high impedance
IMPEDANCE
(voltage) polar input signal.
Sw pos
Action
IN
Arranges to filter input signal.
OUT
Removes filter from input circuitry.
Arranges to accept input signals of various modulation rates. Specific switch
marking determined by timing signals available from the time base
generator.
Sw pos
Action
SYNCHRONOUS
Arranges for synchronous input signals.
START-STOP
Arranges for start-stop input signals.
INTERVALS switch (10- Arranges for input signals having from 7 to 16 bits per character
(start- stop only).
Allows individual transition to be analyzed. Left-hand switch allows selection of either the
mark-to-space (MARK/SPACE) or the space-to-mark(SPACE/MARK) transitions. The
right-hand switch allows selection of any one or all of the character segments
NEUTRAL, 20
NEUTRAL, 60
INPUT FILTER switch (2-position
toggle sw).
BAUDS switch (7-position rotary
sw).
SYNCHRONOUS, START-STOP
Switch (2-position toggle sw).
UNIT position rotary sw).
TRANSMISSION SELECT switches
(left-hand switch, 2-position rotary)
(right-hand switch, 16-position
rotary).
DISTORTION SELECT switch (4position rotary sw).
Selects type of distortion analysis to be made by the digital distortion
analyzer.
Sw pos
Action
AVG
Arranges to indicate the average distortion
of
the selected transitions.
TOTAL PEAK
Arranges to indicate the peak (early or late)
distortion of the selected transitions.
EARLY PEAK
Arranges to indicate the peak early distortion
of the selected transitions.
LATE PEAK
Arranges to indicate the peak late distortion
of the selected transitions.
AGO 1969A
54
Control, indicator or jack
Function
RESET switch (3-position toggle
Resets the PERCENT DISTORTION meter from peak distortion measuresw,
nonlocking
at
MAN ments.
position).
Sw pos
Action
AUTO
Arranges to automatically reset the
PERCENT DISTORTION meter at 3second intervals.
OFF
Disables reset function.
MAN
RESET
(spring-loaded Resets the PERCENT DISTORTION meter
position)
from peak indication.
HIGH Z INPUT jack .....................
Input jack for high-impedance (voltage) polar signals.
LOW Z INPUT jack .....................
Input jack for low-impedance (20, 30, or 60 ma) polar or neutral input signals.
36. Data-Scan Scope
(fig. 33)
Control or indicator
Cathode ray tube (crt) ..................
VERTICAL controls:
CENT control ...........................
GAIN control ............................
INTENSITY control ......................
SCALE ILLUM control ..................
FOCUS control
ASTIGMATISM control .................
HORIZONTAL controls:.................
CENT control ...........................
GAIN control ............................
INTERNAL SWEEP MILLISECONDS controls: ........................
COARSE switch (5-position
rotary sw).
Function
Visually displays input signal.
Adjusts the vertical position of the crt display.
Adjusts the vertical height of the crt display.
Adjusts the brightness of the crt display.
Adjusts the illumination of the crt graticule.
Adjusts the focus of the crt display.
Adjusts the off-center focus of the oscilloscope display.
Adjusts the horizontal position of the oscilloscope display.
Adjusts the horizontal width of the oscilloscope display.
Selects the horizontal sweep frequency rate (coarse) of the data-scan scope.
Sw pos
Action
Arranges for horizontal sweep rates from
0.75 ms/sweep to 3 ms/sweep.
2.5-8
Arranges for horizontal sweep rates from 2.5
ms/sweep to 8 ms/sweep.
7.5-30
Arranges for horizontal sweep rates from 7.5
ms/sweep to 30 ms/sweep.
25-80
Arranges for horizontal sweep rates from 25
ms/sweep to 80 ms/sweep.
75-300
Arranges for horizontal sweep rates from 75
ms/sweep to 300 ms/sweep.
Adjusts the horizontal sweep frequency rate (fine) of the data-scan scope.
Sw pos
Action
AUTO
Arranges to display complete input character
(start-stop input signal only).
TRIGGERED
Arranges to start sweep 1/2 bit before the
transition selected by the digital distortion
analyzer
TRANSITION SELECT switches. Sweep
speed
determined
by
setting
of
INTERNAL
SWEEP MILLISECONDS controls.
FREE
Arranges to generate internal free-running
(nonsynchronized) sweep.
.75-3
FINE control ............................
SWEEP OPTIONS switch (3-position rotary sw).
AGO 1969A
55
Control or indicator
Function
CHARACTER BLANKING controls:
SELECT switch (3-position rotary Selects mode of blanking operation.
sw).
Sw pos
Action
OFF
Disables blanking circuits.
AUTO
Arranges to display one character, then blank
succession characters for 0.5 to 2 seconds
(as
adjusted
by
the
CHARACTER
BLANKING
ADJUST control).
MANUAL
Arranges to unblank display during one character each time the SINGLE SWEEP RELEASE switch is actuated.
ADJUST control .........................
Adjusts the blanking interval during AUTO blanking operation.
SINGLE SWEEP RELEASE
Arranges to display a single character each time switch is depressed (when
switch (nonlocking pushbutton sw).
CHARACTER BLANKING SELECT switch is at MANUAL).
POWER switch (2-position toggle sw). Applies ac power to scan-data scope.
POWER indicator lamp ..................... Lights when power is applied.
Sw pos
Action
INTENSITY MARKERS switch (2ON
Allows crt display to be intensified during
position toggle sw).
transition sense period and selected
character segments.
OFF
Inhibits the intensity modulation signals.
37. Time Base Generator
(fig. 34)
Control or indicator
Oscillator signal indicator lamps .......
VARIABLE OSCILLATOR
BAUDS switch (5-position rotary
sw).
VARIABLE OSCILLATOR
BAUDS control.
AUDIBLE ALARM switch (3position toggle).
ALARM indicator lamp ......................
Function
Lamps light when oscillators are operating. If oscillator fails, applicable lamp
goes off. Number on lamps indicates baud rate of corresponding printed
circuit oscillator card. Lamps along right side of front panel are not used.
Arranges variable frequency oscillator to produce baud timing signals from
30 to 110 bauds in 20-baud ranges.
Adjusts frequency of variable frequency oscillator within the 20-baud range
selected by VARIABLE OSCILLATOR BAUDS switch.
Sw pos
Action
ON
Enables audible alarm circuit.
OFF
Disables audible alarm circuit.
RESET
Resets audible alarm circuit.
Lights to indicate oscillator failure alarm condition.
AGO 1969A
56
Figure 33. Data-scan scope, front panel
AGO 1969A
57
Figure 34. Time base generator, front panel.
38. Test Pattern Distortion Generator
a. Front Panel Controls (fig. 27).
Control, indicator, or jack
DISTORTION switch (4-position
rotary sw).
Function
Selects type of test pattern distortion generator output signal
Sw pos
OFF
SPACING BIAS
PERCENT DISTORTION switches
(TENS: 5-position rotary sw).
(UNITS: 10-position rotary sw).
SYNCHRONOUS, START-STOP
switch (2-position rotary).
MARK-SPACE switches (eight 2position toggle switches).
Action
Arranges to produce undistorted output signal.
Arranges to produce output signal in which the
space-to-mark transitions are late.
MARKING BIAS
Arranges to produce output signal in which the
space-to-mark transitions are early.
SWITCHED BIAS
Arranges to produce output signal in which the
space-to-mark transitions are alternately
early and late on a character basis.
Selects magnitude of distortion in output signal. UNITS switch selects distortion
in 1-percent steps and TENS switch selects distortion in 10-percent steps.Sw pos
SYNCHRONOUS
Action
Arranges to produce synchronous output
signals.
START-STOP
Arranges to produce start-stop output signals.
Arranges each bit of selected character for transmission as mark or space signal.
AGO 1969A
58
Control, indicator, or jack
LEVEL CODE switch (4-position
rotary switch).
BAUDS switch ..................................
SIGNAL OUTPUT jack .....................
PATTERN SELECTOR switch (3position rotary sw).
Function
Arranges to produce selected character having from 5 to 8 information bits
per character.
Arranges to operate at various modulation rates (specific position markings
determined by timing signals available from time base generator).
Jack for connection of output.
Arranges to produce various test signals.
Sw pos
REVERSAL
POWER indicator lamp ....................
SIGNAL indicator lamp .....................
CHARACTER RELEASE switch
(3-position rotary sw).
Action
Arranges to produce alternate mark and space
signals.
TEST MESSAGE
Arranges to produce "Quick brown fox" test
message.
SELECTED
Arranges to produce test character as formed
CHARACTER
by the position of the MARK-SPACE
switches.
Lights when dc power is applied from power supply.
Indicates presence of output signal. (On for mark, off for space).
Selects method of character timing of output signal.
Sw pos
STEPPED
STEADY MARK
FREE RUN
Action
Arranges to produce single output character in
response to step signal from external source.
Arranges to produce constant mark signal.
Arranges to produce serial string of successive
characters.
b. Rear Panel (fig. 16).
Control
Function
Sw pod
JACK SIGNAL SELECTOR switch
(3-position rotary sw).
MECH
ELECT
ELECT (MECH OFF)
Action
Arranges to supply mechanical relay output to
SIGNAL OUTPUT jack.
Arranges to supply electronic relay output to
SIGNAL OUTPUT jack.
Arranges to supply electronic relay output to
SIGNAL OUTPUT jack and to inhibit mechanical relay.
39. Power Supply (fig. 29)
Control
POWER switch (2-position toggle
sw).
- 15 v ADJ control ............................
+ 15 v ADJ control ............................
Function
Controls application of input ac power to the power supply.
Controls output voltage measured between - 15 and GRD jacks.
Controls output voltage measured between + 15 and GRD jacks.
AGO 1969A
59
Section III. OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS
40. General
a. Generally, the component equipments of the
AN/GGM-(*) are operated independently and the same
general procedures apply, regardless of the particular
AN/GGM-(*) in use. One exception is that the data-scan
scope must be operated in conjunction with the digital
distortion analyzer. Thus, the operational procedures for
the digital distortion analyzer, power supply, time base
generator, and test pattern distortion generator are
presented separately in this section and an additional
procedure is provided for concurrent operation of the
data-scan scope and digital distortion analyzer.
b. The paragraphs containing the applicable
equipment operating procedures for each AN/ GGM-(*)
are listed in the following chart:
Analysis group model
Reference paragraphs
AN/GGM-1 ........................
AN/GGM-2 ........................
AN/GGM-3 ........................
AN/GGM-4 .......................
AN/GGM-5 ........................
41, 42, 43, 44, 45
41, 42, 43, 44, 45
41, 43, 44, 45
41, 44, 45
41, 45
(6) If the input signal is in a mark condition or
is being keyed, the digital distortion
analyzer SIGNAL indicator lamp should
light. If the lamp does not light, reverse
the position of the INPUT POLARITY
switch.
(7) To eliminate transients and noise from the
input signal before analysis, operate the
INPUT FILTER switch to IN. To analyze
the signal with the transients and noise
present, operate the switch to OUT.
(8) If automatic reset of the meter at 3second intervals is desired, operate the
RESET switch to AUTO.
(9) If the input signal is synchronous, the time
delay necessary to allow the servo timing
loop to null on the input signal may be
shortened by momentarily operating the
SYNCHRONOUS, START-STOP switch
to START-STOP and then returning the
switch to the SYNCHRONOUS position.
Note.
The operating procedures in b
through f below are for analyzing all
character segments of the input
signal characters If the input signal
is start-stop, any selected segment
within the characters may be
individually analyzed by operation of
the right-hand TRANSITION SELECT
switch from the ALL position to the
position that indicates the number of
the desired character sequence. The
number is derived by counting onebit character segments, starting at
the middle of the start space (A, fig.
32). For example, to analyze the end
transition of the first information bit,
place the right-hand TRANSITION
SELECT switch at 2; the analyzer
then senses only those transitions
occurring from the middle of the first
information bit to the middle of
second information bit. If the input
signal
is
synchronous,
the
TRANSITION SELECT switch may
also be used to select individual
transitions for analysis; however,
since the digital distortion analyzer
does not establish character framing
in synchronous operation, the
relationship of the selected transition
to the composite character normally
cannot be determined.
41. Digital Distortion Analyzer
Note.
If abnormal indications are obtained
during operation of the digital
distortion analyzer, refer to the
applicable equipment performance
checklist (par.
53) for corrective
measures.
a. Preliminary Operating Procedures.
(1) If the input signal is synchronous, set the
SYNCHRONOUS, START-STOP switch
to SYNCHRONOUS. If the input signal is
start-stop, operate the switch to STARTSTOP.
(2) Operate the INPUT SELECT switch to the
position that indicates the type (polar or
neutral) and current (20, 30, or 60 ma or
high impedance) of the input signal.
(3) Operate the BAUDS switch to the position
that indicates the baud rate of the input
signal.
(4) If the input signal is start-stop, operate the
UNIT INTERVALS switch to the position
that indicates the number of bits per
character of the input signal. If the signal
is synchronous, the UNIT INTERVALS
switch may be operated to any position.
(5) Connect the input signal to the digital
distortion analyzer as described in the
applicable input signal loop connection
paragraph (par. 25).
AGO 1969A
60
measurements, the speed of the
transmitter is fast. If the LATE indicator
lamp lights during the measurements, the
transmitter speed is slow.
Note.
Since the stability of the time base
generator is inferior to that of the
clock
used
in
synchronous
telegraphy, the AN/GGM(*) cannot be
used to measure the speed error of
synchronous signals.
d. Total Peak Distortion Measurements.
To
measure the total peak distortion of the input signal,
proceed as follows:
(1) Operate the DISTORTION SELECT
switch to TOTAL PEAK.
(2) Operate the right-hand TRANSITION
SELECT switch to ALL.
(3) The PERCENT DISTORTION meter
indicates the peak (maximum) distortion
of the input signal.
(4) Operate the RESET switch to MAN to
reset the meter.
e. Early Peak Distortion Measurements.
To
measure the early peak distortion (the maximum early
transition displacement) of the input signal, proceed as
follows:
(1) Operate the DISTORTION SELECT
switch to EARLY PEAK.
(2) Operate the right-hand TRANSITION
SELECT switch to ALL.
(3) Operate the left-hand TRANSITION
SELECT switch to SPACE/MARK (4) The
peak (maximum) early displacement of
the space-to-mark transitions is indicated
on the PERCENT DISTORTION meter.
(5) Operate the RESET switch to MAN to
reset the meter.
(6) Operate the left-hand TRANSITION
SELECT switch to MARK/SPACE.
(7) The peak (maximum) early displacement
of the reference mark-to-space transitions
is
indicated
on
the
PERCENT
DISTORTION meter.
b. Average Bias Distortion Measurements. To
measure the average bias distortion of the input signal,
proceed as follows:
(1) Operate the DISTORTION SELECT
switch to AVG.
(2) Operate the right-hand TRANSITION
SELECT switch to ALL.
(3) Set the left-hand TRANSITION SELECT
switch to SPACE/MARK.
(4) The average displacement of the spaceto-mark transitions of the input signal is
indicated on the PERCENT DISTORTION
meter. If the EARLY indicator lamp is on,
marking bias distortion is indicated. If the
LATE indicator lamp is on, spacing bias
distortion is indicated.
c. Start-Stop Speed Error Measurements. The
speed error (the difference between the transmitter
distributor speed and the reference speed established by
the AN/GGM-(*)) of the input signal may be determined
by the following procedure:
(1) Measure the total peak distortion (d
below) of each transition of the input
signal (by rotating the right-hand
TRANSITION SELECT switch from
position 1 through each character
segment of the input signal being
measured).
(2) If, as the right-hand TRANSITION
SELECT switch is operated from 1,
through each character segment of the
input signal, an increasing distortion is
noted, a speed error is probably present.
The average increase in distortion in each
position of the right-hand TRANSITION
SELECT switch is the approximate speed
difference expressed in percent of one bit.
For example, if the first transition was
distorted 3 percent, the second 7 percent,
the third 10 percent, the fourth 12 percent,
and the fifth 15 percent; the approximate
speed error would be 3 percent.
(3) To determine whether the speed error is
fast or slow, measure the average
distortion of both the space-mark and
mark-space transitions. If the EARLY
indicator lamp lights during the
AGO 1969A
61
(8) Operate the RESET switch to MAN to
reset the meter.
f. Late Peak Distortion Measurements.
To
measure the late peak distortion (the maximum late
transition displacement) of the input signal, proceed as
follows:
(1) Operate the DISTORTION SELECT
switch to LATE PEAK.
(2) Operate the right-hand TRANSITION
SELECT switch to ALL.
(3) Operate the left-hand TRANSITION
SELECT switch to SPACE/MARK.
(4) The peak (maximum) late displacement
of the space-to-mark transitions is
indicated on the PERCENT DISTORTION
meter.
(5) Operate the RESET switch to MAN to
reset the meter.
(6) Operate the left-hand TRANSITION
SELECT switch to MARK/SPACE.
(7) The peak (maximum) late displacement
of the reference mark-to-space transitions
is
indicated
on
the
PERCENT
DISTORTION meter.
(8) Operate the RESET switch to MAN to
reset the meter.
g. Stopping Procedure.
To stop the digital
distortion analyzer, loosen the equipment securing knob
at the bottom center of the front panel and withdraw the
analyzer about 2 inches from the shelf adapter or
equipment housing.
(1) If replacement of the defective printed
circuit card at the time of alarm is
convenient, notify second echelon
maintenance personnel to replace it with
an operational card of the correct
frequency.
(2) If the printed circuit card cannot be
immediately replaced, notify the operators
of all equipments receiving timing signals
from the time base generator, that the
particular baud rate card is defective.
The audible alarm may be muted by
operating the AUDIBLE ALARM switch to
OFF. The ALARM indicator lamp will
remain on. If the defective oscillator
should become inoperative, the alarm
lamp will remain on although the
corresponding oscillator signal indicator
lamp will light. Operate the AUDIBLE
ALARM switch to RESET to reset the
audible alarm circuit.
c. Stopping Procedure. To stop the time base
generator, loosen the chassis securing knob at the
bottom center of the front panel and withdraw the time
base generator about 2 inches from the shelf adapter or
equipment housing.
43. Test Pattern Distortion Generator
Note.
If abnormal indications are obtained
during operation of the test pattern
distortion generator, refer to the
applicable equipment performance
checklist (par.
53) for corrective measures.
42. Time Base Generator
Note.
If abnormal indications are obtained
during operation of the time base
generator, refer to the applicable
equipment performance checklist
(par. 53), for corrective measures.
a. Preliminary Operating Procedures.
(1) If the output signal is to be start-stop,
operate the SYNCHRONOUS, STARTSTOP switch to START-STOP. If the
output signal is to be synchronous
(available
only
with
SELECTED
CHARACTER and REVERSAL message),
place the switch in the SYNCHRONOUS
position.
(2) Operate the BAUDS switch to the position
indicating the desired output signal
modulation rate.
(3) If the output signal is to be a selected
character, operate the LEVEL CODE
switch to the position indicating the
desired number of information bits per
character.
a. Variable Frequency Oscillator Adjustment. To
adjust the variable frequency oscillator to any specific
frequency in the range of 30 to 110 bauds, set the
VARIABLE OSCILLATOR BAUDS controls such that
their indicated digits total the desired modulation rate.
For example, if a modulation rate of 60 bauds is
desired, set the controls as shown in figure 34.
b. Operation Upon Oscillator Failure Alarm.
When an oscillator failure is indicated by the audible
alarm and the extinguishing of one or more oscillator
signal indicator lamps, proceed as follows:
AGO 1969A
62
in 7.42 Baudot code, the LEVEL CODE switch is
operated to 5 and MARK-SPACE switches 1, 4, and 5
are operated to MARK and switches 2 and 3 are
operated to SPACE. MARK-SPACE switches 6, 7, and
8 may be operated to either MARK or SPACE.
d. Stopping Procedures. To stop the test pattern
distortion generator, loosen the equipment securing
knob at the bottom center of the front panel and
withdraw the test pattern distortion generator about 2
inches from the shelf adapter or equipment housing.
(4) Operate the CHARACTER RELEASE
switch to STEPPED if an external step
signal is to control the character rate of
the output signal. If a steady marking
signal is desired for adjusting loop current,
etc., operate the CHARACTER RELEASE
switch to STEADY MARK.
If the
characters are to be successive without
control from an external step signal, place
the CHARACTER RELEASE switch at
FREE RUN.
(5) Operate the PATTERN SELECTOR
switch to the position that indicates the
type of test pattern desired. If the signal
is to be distorted, set the MARK-SPACE
switches as outlined in c below.
b. Distortion Adjustments. To provide distortion in
the test pattern distortion generator output signal, follow
the procedures outlined below.
(1) Operate the DISTORTION switch to the
type of distortion desired (par. 38)
(2) To adjust the magnitude of the output
signal distortion, set the PERCENT
DISTORTION switches such that the total
of the numbers indicated by the TENS
control and the UNITS control equals the
desired distortion. For example, if 15percent distortion is desired, set the TENS
switch to 10 and the UNITS switch to 5.
c. Formation of Selected Characters. To form a
specific character for transmission, first operate the
LEVEL CODE switch to the position that indicates the
number of information bits per character; then operate
the MARK-SPACE switches to the positions to
correspond to the desired character. For example, the
letter B in the 067 IBM 10.42 level data code is
composed of 8 information bits as follows: space, space,
mark, space, mark, mark, space, mark. To transmit this
character, the LEVEL CODE switch would be operated
to 8 and MARK-SPACE switches 1 and 2 would be
operated to SPACE; 3 to MARK; 4 to SPACE; 5 and 6 to
MARK; 7 to SPACE; and 8 would be operated to MARK.
When a character having a code level less than 8 is
transmitted, the unused MARK-SPACE switches may be
left in any position. For example, to transmit the letter B
44. Data-Scan Scope
Note.
If abnormal indications are obtained
during operation of the data-scan
scope, refer to the applicable
equipment performance checklist
(par. 53) for corrective measures.
a. General. The data-scan scope can only be
operated in conjunction with the digital distortion
analyzer because the sweep, blanking, intensifying, and
triggering signals for the operation of the data-scan
scope are applied from the digital distortion analyzer
and are controlled by the setting of the digital distortion
analyzer controls. Because of the interaction of the
digital distortion analyzer, the operating procedures in b
through g include instructions for operation of both the
digital distortion analyzer and the data-scan scope;
however, only those indications displayed by the datascan scope will be included in this section.
For
information regarding the digital distortion analyzer
indications, refer to paragraph 41.
b. Starting Procedures.
(1) Adjust the INTENSITY control to its
extreme counterclockwise position.
(2) Adjust the VERTICAL CENT, VERTICAL
GAIN,
HORIZONTAL
GAIN,
and
HORIZONTAL CENT controls to their
midrange positions.
(3) Operate the POWER switch to ON.
The POWER indicator lamp should light.
AGO 1969A
63
(4) Allow the data-scan scope to warm up for
10 minutes.
c. Preliminary Operating Adjustments.
(1) Connect the input signal to the digital
distortion analyzer (par. 25).
(2) Operate the data-scan scope SWEEP
OPTIONS switch to TRIGGERED.
(3) Operate
the
data-scan
scope
CHARACTER BLANKING SELECT switch
to OFF.
(4) Operate the INTENSITY MARKERS
switch to ON.
(5) Rotate the data-scan scope INTENSITY
control clockwise until the input signal
pattern is displayed on the data-scan
scope screen at the desired brightness.
The intensity should be low enough to
allow the intensity pips to be observed.
second horizontal graticule mark below
the center horizontal graticule mark. A
properly positioned and adjusted pattern
is illustrated in A, figure 35.
(10) Adjust the FOCUS control until the portion
of the pattern positioned near the center
of the screen appears sharp and clear.
(11) Adjust the ASTIGMATISM control until
the overall pattern and especially those
portions of the pattern at the extreme
edges of the screen are properly focused.
(12) Adjust the SCALE ILLUM control until the
desired brightness of the graticule scale is
obtained.
d. Operational Procedures for Automatic Character
Display. In the automatic character display mode, the
data-scan scope presents a display containing a signal
input character. The AUTO sweep option is available
only with start-stop input signals. To arrange the datascan scope for automatic character display, perform the
steps in c above, then proceed as indicated below.
(1) Operate the SWEEP OPTIONS switch to
AUTO.
(2) To view successive characters of the
input signal, operate the CHARACTER
BLANKING SELECT switch to OFF.
(3) If it is desired that all characters for a
specific time interval following the display
of a single character be blanked, operate
the CHARACTER BLANKING SELECT
switch to AUTO and adjust the
CHARACTER
BLANKING
ADJUST
control for the desired blanking interval.
(4) To cause a single character to be
displayed upon a manual signal, operate
the CHARACTER BLANKING SELECT
switch to MANUAL and depress the
SINGLE SWEEP RELEASE switch each
time a character is to be displayed.
(5) As individual character segments are
analyzed by the digital distortion analyzer,
the selected segment of the character will
be intensified on the data-scan scope
display. If the intensified patterns are not
desired,
operate
the
INTENSITY
MARKERS switch to OFF.
Caution:
If the intensity of the data-scan
scope display is excessive, the face
of the crt may be permanently
damaged by burning. Never adjust
the INTENSITY control to the point
that a halo forms about the data-scan
scope display.
(6) Adjust the HORIZONTAL CENT control
until the pattern is centered horizontally
on the data-scan scope screen.
(7) Adjust the VERTICAL CENT control until
the pattern is centered vertically on the
data-scan scope screen.
(8) Adjust the HORIZONTAL GAIN control
until the pattern displayed on the datascan scope screen extends from the
vertical graticule line at the left side of the
screen to the vertical graticule line at the
right side of the screen.
(9) Adjust the VERTICAL GAIN control until
the pattern displayed on the data-scan
scope screen extends vertically from the
second horizontal graticule mark above
the center horizontal graticule mark to the
AGO 1969A
64
Figure 35. Data-scan scope, typical display waveforms.
AGO 1969A
65
(5) Operate the CHARACTER BLANKING
SELECT switch and ADJUST control to
obtain the desired blanking.
f. Operational Procedures for Free Running
Display. In the free running display mode, the data-scan
scope sweep is triggered and is generated internally.
The sweep speed is controlled by the INTERNAL
SWEEP MILLISECONDS COARSE switch and FINE
control. Since the sweep is untriggered, the free running
mode of operation facilitates the use of the data-scan
scope for conventional oscilloscope test purposes. To
operate the data-scan scope in the free running mode,
proceed as follows:
(1) Perform the procedures given in b above.
(2) Operate the SWEEP OPTIONS switch to
FREE.
(3) Operate the CHARACTER BLANKING
SELECT switch to OFF.
(4) Disconnect the wire connected to the
VERT terminal on the rear of the shelf
adapter (sets AN/GGM-1, AN/ GGM-3,
and AN/GGM-4 only) and connect a test
probe to the terminal.
(5) Connect the probe to the circuit or point to
be viewed.
(6) Adjust
the
INTERNAL
SWEEP
MILLISECONDS COARSE and FINE
controls to obtain the desired pattern.
g. Stopping Procedure. To stop the data-scan
scope, operate the POWER switch to the downward (off)
position.
(6) Typical AUTO sweep data-scan scope
patterns for various distortion conditions
are illustrated in A through D and F, figure
35.
e. Operational Procedures for Triggered Display.
In the triggered display mode, the data-scan scope is
triggered at the start of the character segment, which is
selected by the right-hand TRANSITION SELECT switch
on the digital distortion analyzer. The sweep speed of
the data-scan in the triggered mode is determined by
the INTERNAL SWEEP MILLISECONDS COARSE
switch and FINE control on the data-scan scope. The
speed of the sweep may be adjusted such that a single
transition is displayed on the data-scan scope to
facilitate the analysis of an individual segment of the
incoming signal. To operate the data-scan scope in the
triggered mode, proceed as follows:
(1) Perform the procedures given in c above.
(2) Perform the procedures given in d above,
and, by observing the intensified
segments of the data-scan scope display
when the digital distortion analyzer righthand TRANSITION SELECT switch is
operated, select the character segment
which is to be examined. Operate the
digital distortion analyzer right-hand
TRANSITION SELECT switch to the
position indicating the desired segment.
(3) Operate the SWEEP OPTIONS switch on
the data-scan scope to TRIGGERED.
(4) Adjust
the
INTERNAL
SWEEP
MILLISECONDS COARSE switch and
FINE
control
until
the
desired
magnification of the data-scan scope
display is obtained. A typical triggered
sweep data-scan scope pattern is
illustrated in E, figure 35.
45. Power Supply
a. Starting Procedure. To place the power supply
in operation, operate the POWER switch to ON.
b. Stopping Procedure. To stop the power supply,
operate the POWER switch to the downward (off)
position.
Section IV. OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
characteristics over a wide temperature and humidity
range, adverse climatic conditions may affect proper
operation. Paragraphs 47 through 49 describe
procedures that will minimize these effects.
46. General
Difficulty may be encountered in operation of the
AN/GGM-(*) where extreme cold, heat, humidity,
excessive moisture, sand, or dust conditions prevail.
Although the components maintain their technical
AGO 1969A
66
minimize this condition, provide as much ventilation as
possible. Dry the AN/GGM-(*) components thoroughly
before operating.
7. Operation in Arctic Climates
a. Keep the AN/GGM-(*) components warm and
dry.
b. Keep the power on continuously if possible.
c. When equipment that has been exposed to the
cold is brought into a warm room, moisture will gather
on it and cause a change in operating characteristics.
Apply the power and, after the AN/GGM-(*) reaches
room temperature, dry the components thoroughly.
49. Operation in Desert Climates
a. The main problem that arises with operation of
the AN/GGM-(*) in desert areas is the large amount of
sand, dust, and dirt that enters the chassis.
b. Keep the equipment as free from dust as
possible.
Make frequent preventive maintenance
checks (par. 51). The AN/GGM-(*) does not require
lubrication and should be kept free from oil and grease.
48. Operations in Tropical Climates
When the AN/GGM-(*) is operated in tropical climates,
the high relative humidity causes condensation on the
equipment whenever the temperature of the equipment
becomes lower than that of the surrounding air. To
AGO 1969A
67
CHAPTER 4
OPERATOR'S MAINTENANCE
Items
50. General
a. The operator's maintenance for Test Set,
Teletypewriter AN/GGM-(*) includes the following:
(1) Preventive maintenance (par. 51).
(2) Visual inspection (par. 52).
(3) Troubleshooting (equipment performance
checklists (par. 53)).
(4) Replacement of defective indicator lamps
and fuses.
b. The materials required by the operator to
perform preventive maintenance for Test Set,
Teletypewriter AN/GGM-(*) are Cleaning Compound
(Federal Stock No. 7930395-9542) and a lint-free cloth.
3
4
52. Visual Inspection
a. When Test Set, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-(*) fails
to perform properly, obtain permission to turn off the
power and check the items listed below. Do not check
any items with the power on.
(1) Incorrect settings of switches and controls
(par. 40 through 45).
(2) Burned out power supply or fuses (usually
indicates some other fault).
(3) Incorrect or faulty connections.
b. If the above checks do not correct the
malfunction, perform the procedures in the appropriate
equipment performance checklist (par. 53).
Warning:
Cleaning compound is flammable
and its fumes are toxic. Do not use
near a flame; provide adequate
ventilation.
51. Preventive Maintenance
a. DA Form 11-266. Items 1 through 5, 10, and
11, on DA Form 11-266 (figs. 36 and 37) should be
used as a checklist by the operator when performing
preventive maintenance on the AN/GGM-(*). Items not
applicable to the equipment are lined out in the figures.
Reference in the ITEM block in the figures are to the
items in this paragraph that contain additional
information on the particular item. Instructions for the
use of the form appear on the front of the form.
Note.
Delete item 7 on DA Form 11-266 for
the AN/GGM-1, AN/GGM-3, AN/GGM4, and AN/GGM-6.
b. Items. The information contained in the chart
below is supplementary to DA Form 11266. The item
numbers correspond to the ITEM number on the form.
Items
1
Maintenance procedures
the parts; then wipe the parts with a clean
dry cloth.
Be sure that all controls work smoothly. The
knobs should be tight on their shafts and
should not bind in any position.
Use the equipment performance checklist to
check for proper operation.
53. Equipment Performance Checklists
a. General.
The equipment performance
checklists provide procedure for systematically checking
the operational performance of Test Set, Teletypewriter
AN/GGM-(*). When using a checklist, start at the
beginning and follow the steps in order.
If the
equipment fails to operate correctly during any step,
perform the corrective measure given in the corrective
measures column. If the measures taken do not correct
the defect, request higher echelon maintenance. Note
on the repair tag how the equipment performed and
what corrective measures were performed.
b. Checklist for AN/GGM-1, AN/GGM-2, and
AN/GGM-4.
Note.
Make all the installation connections
appropriate for the equipment being
checked as covered in paragraphs 18
through 30.
Maintenance procedures
Use a clean cloth to remove dust, dirt, moisture,
and grease from the AN/GGM-(*) front
panels and controls). If necessary, dampen
the cloth with cleaning compound to clean
AGO 1969A
68
Figure 36. DA Form 11-266, pages 1 and 4.
AGO 1969A
69
Figure 37. DA Form 11-266, pages 2 and 3.
AGO 1969A
70
ITEM NO.
INSTRUCTIONS
1
Operate power supply POWER switch to ON.
2
Operate data-scan scope POWER switch to:
ON.
Operate JACK SIGNAL SELECTOR switch,
on rear of the AN/GGM-(*) to MECH.
Arrange test pattern distortion generator controls as follows:
Switch
Portion
DISTORTION
OFF
PERCENT
0
DISTORTION
SYNCHRONOUS,
START-STOP
START-STOP
MARK-SPACE
Any
LEVEL CODE
5
BAUDS
37
PATTERN SELECTOR
TEST MESSAGE
CHARACTER
STEADY MARK
RELEASE
Arrange digital distortion analyzer controls as
follows:
Switch
Position
INPUT POLARITY
+
INPUT SELECT
POLAR, 20 or
30 MA
INPUT FILTER
OUT
BAUDS
37
SYNCHRONOUS,
START-STOP
START-STOP
3
4
5
NORMAL INDICATORS
CORRECTIVE MEASURES
POWER supply blower fan starts.
Check AC LINE fuses on power supply (fig.
29).
Check power cord and connections.
POWER indicator lamp on digital distortion
Check digital distortion analyzer ±15-vdc
analyzer lights.
fuses (fig. 8).
Check digital distortion analyzer POWER indicator lamp.
POWER indicator lamp on test pattern distorCheck test pattern distortion generator ±15tion generator lights.
vdc fuses (fig. 16).
Note. The Normal indication for the time base gen- Check test pattern distortion generator
erator (below) applies only to the AN/GGM-1 and
POWER indicator lamp.
AN/GGM-2.
Time base generator baud-rate oscillator
If all of the oscillator lamps fail to light,
lamps light (those connected to operative
check time base generator ±15-vdc fuses
oscillator cards).
(fig. 13).
Data-scan scope POWER indicator lamp lights.
Check data-scan scope fuse (fig. 10).
Test pattern distortion generators SIGNAL
indicators lamp lights.
AGO 1969A
71
Check test pattern distortion generator -120vdc fuse (fig. 16).
ITEM NO.
6
7
8
9
INSTRUCTIONS
UNIT INTERVALS
8
TRANSITION
SPACE/MARK
SELECT
ALL
DISTORTION
AVG
SELECT
RESET
OFF
Using procedures described in paragraph 44,
make preliminary adjustments of data-scan
scope and then arrange unit for AUTO sweep
operation (INTENSITY MARKER switch
ON).
Arrange test pattern distortion generator mechanical relay loop battery for polar 30-ma
operation (par. 27).
Connect two-conductor phone plug patch cord
between test pattern distortion generator
SIGNAL OUTPUT jack and digital distortion analyzer LOW Z INPUT jack.
Operate test pattern distortion generator DISTORTION switch to SPACING BIAS and
CHARACTER RELEASE switch to FREE
RUN.
10
Operate digital distortion analyzer right-hand
TRANSITION SELECT switch to 1.
11
Operate data-scan scope SWEEP OPTIONS
switch to TRIGGERED.
12
Adjust data-scan scope INTERNAL SWEEP
MILLISECOND SELECT and ADJUST
controls.
NORMAL INDICATORS
CORRECTIVE MEASURES
As described in paragraph 44.
If crt graticule does not light, check graticule
lamps (par. 54).
SIGNAL indicator lamp on digital distortion
analyzer lights.
Reverse position of digital distortion analyzer
INPUT POLARITY switch.
Check SIGNAL indicator lamp.
Check -120-vdc fuse (fig. 8).
If pattern is not displayed on data-scan scope,
check mechanical relay. If relay is not operating (as indicated by check for vibration
and buzz), check relay and replace if defective.
Note. The mechanical relay for the AN/GGM-1 and
AN/GGM-2 is located in the time base generators. The
mechanical relay for the AN/GGM-1 is located on shelf
adapter 2B.
Check RELAY F2 fuse on rear of time base
generator (fig. 13).
Note. Relay fuse F2 for the AN/GGM-1 and
AN/GGM-2 is located at the rear of the time base genrator (fig. 18). RELAY fuse F2 for the AN/GGM-3 is
located on the rear of shelf adapter 2B (fig. 23).
Successive characters displayed on data-scan
scope.
Segment from middle of start space to middle
of first bit is intensified on data-scan scope
display.
Data-scan scope sweep starts with segment
selected by digital distortion analyzer righthand TRANSITION SELECT switch.
As data-scan scope INTERNAL SWEEP MILLISECONDS controls are advanced, scope
display is expanded.
AGO 1969A
72
13
13
14
s
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Operatedata-scan scope CHARACTER
BLANKING SELECT switch to AUTO. ADJUST CHARACTER BLANKING ADJUST
control clockwise.
Operate data-scan scope CHARACTER
BLANKING SELECT switch to MANUAL.
Depress SINGLE SWEEP RELEASE
witch.
Operate data-scan scope INTENSITY MARKERS switch to OFF.
Operate data-scan scope POWER switch to off
(downward) position.
Operate digital distortion analyzer right-hand
TRANSITION SELECT switch to ALL.
Operate test pattern distortion generator PERCENT DISTORTION TENS switch through
each position; observe the digital distortion
analyzer indications at each switch position.
Operate digital distortion analyzer DISTORTION SELECT switch to TOTAL PEAK.
Operate test pattern distortion generator PERCENT DISTORTION UNITS switch to 9.
Operate test pattern distortion generator PERCENT DISTORTION TENS switch and
UNITS switch to 0.
Operate digital distortion analyzer RESET
switch to MAN.
Operate test pattern distortion generator PERCENT DISTORTION TENS switch to 40.
Operate test pattern distortion generator PERCENT DISTORTION TENS switch to 0.
Operatedigital distortion analyzer RESET
switch to AUTO and wait about 3 seconds.
Operate digital distortion analyzer RESET
switch to OFF.
Operate digital distortion analyzer DISTORTION SELECT switch to EARLY PEAK.
Operate test pattern distortion generator PERCENT DISTORTION TENS switch to 40.
Operate test pattern distortion generator DISTORTION switch to MARKING BIAS.
Operate test pattern distortion generator DISTORTION switch to OFF.
Operate digital distortion analyzer RESET
switch to MAN.
As character BLANKING ADJUST control is
adjusted, time interval between character
displays is increased.
Single character is displayed each time
SINGLE SWEEP RELEASE switch is
operated.
Intensity modulation of crt display is removed.
POWER indicator lamp goes out. Crt display
fades out.
As test pattern distortion generator distortion
is increased, digital distortion analyzer indicates late space-to-mark distortion of 10,
20, 30, and 40 percent respectively.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indicates
49-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication
remains at 40-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication
falls to 0-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indicates
40-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication
remains at 40-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication
is reset to 0-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication
remains at 0-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indicates
40-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication
remains at 40-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication
falls to 0-percent distortion.
AGO 1969A
73
Check digital distortion analyzer LATE indicator lamp.
ITEM NO.
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
INSTRUCTIONS
Operate digital distortion analyzer DISTORTION SELECT switch to LATE PEAK.
Operate test pattern distortion generator DISTORTION switch to SPACING BIAS.
Operate test pattern distortion generator DISTORTION switch to OFF.
Operate digital distortion analyzer RESET
switch to MAN.
Operate digital distortion analyzer DISTORTION SELECT switch to AVG.
Operate test pattern distortion generator DISTORTION switch to SWITCHED BIAS.
Operate test pattern distortion generator DISTORTION switch to OFF.
Operate test pattern distortion generator PATTERN SELECTOR switch to SELECTED
CHARACTER.
Operate test pattern distortion generator
MARK-SPACE switches as follows:
MARK-SPACE switch
Position
1
MARK
2
SPACE
3
MARK
4
SPACE
5
MARK
6
SPACE
7
MARK
8
SPACE
Operate test pattern distortion generator
LEVEL CODE switch to 8.
Operate digital distortion analyzer UNIT INTERVALS switch to 10.
Operate test pattern distortion generator DISTORTION switch to SPACING BIAS.
Operate digital distortion analyzer right-hand
TRANSITION SELECT switch to 1, 3, 5, 7,
and 9 and operate RESET switch to MAN
in each position.
Operate digital distortion analyzer right-hand
TRANSITION SELECT switch to 2, 4, 6,
NORMAL INDICATORS
Digital distortion analyzer meter indicates
40-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication
remains at 40-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication
falls to 0-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indicates
40-percent distortion and EARLY and
LATE lamps light alternately.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication
falls to 0-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indicates
40-percent distortion and LATE lamp lights.
In each switch position, digital distortion
analyzer meter indicates 40-percent distortion and LATE lamp lights.
In each switch position, digital distortion
analyzer meter indicates O-percent distor-
AGO 1969A
74
CORRECTIVE MEASURES
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
and 8 and operate RESET switch to MAN in tion.
each position.
Arrange test pattern distortion generator
MARK-SPACE switches as follows:
MARK-SPACE switch
Position
1
SPACE
2
MARK
3
SPACE
4
MARK
5
SPACE
6
MARK
7
SPACE
8
MARK
Operate digital distortion analyzer right-hand
TRANSITION SELECT switch to 2, 4, 6,
and 8, and operate RESET switch to MAN
in each position.
Operate digital distortion analyzer right-hand
TRANSITION SELECT switch to 1, 3, 5,
7, and 9, and operate RESET switch to MAN
in each switch position.
Operate test pattern distortion generator PATTERN SELECTOR switch to REVERSAL.
Operate digital distortion analyzer right-hand
TRANSITION SELECT switch to ALL.
Operatedigital distortion analyzer and test
pattern distortion generator SYNCHRONOUS, START-STOP switches to SYNCHRONOUS.
Repeat Items No. 49-51 with test pattern
distortion generator and digital distortion
analyzer BAUDS switch operated to each
available baud rate.
Operate test pattern distortion CHARACTER
RELEASE switch to STEADY MARK and
operate the PERCENT DISTORTION
TENS and UNITS switches to 0.
Connect output of test pattern distortion generator to a 60-ma loop connected to a teleprinter.
Operate test pattern distortion generator
PATTERN SELECTOR switch to TEST
MESSAGE.
In each switch position, digital distortion
analyzer meter indicates 40-percent distortion and the LATE lamp lights.
In each switch position, digital distortion
analyzer meter indicates 0-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indicates
40-percent distortion and LATE indicator
lamp is on.
Digital distortion analyzer meter slowly oscillates and then settles to indicate 40-percent
distortion.
Same as items No. 50 and 51.
AGO 1969A
75
ITEM NO.
56
INSTRUCTIONS
Operate test pattern distortion generator
SYNCHRONOUS, START-STOP switch to
START-STOP.
Operate test pattern distortion generator
BAUDS switch to position indicating speed
to which teleprinter is adjusted to operate.
Operate test pattern distortion generator
CHARACTER RELEASE switch to FREE
RUN.
57
58
59
Repeat items No. 53-58 with test pattern distortion generator rear panel JACK SIGNAL
SELECTOR switch set to ELECT.
NORMAL INDICATORS
Teleprinter prints out THE QUICK BROWN
(five spaces FOX JUMPS OVER A LAZY
DOGS BACK 1234567890 DE (station call
letters).
Same as item No. 58.
CORRECTIVE MEASURES
Check ELECT OUTPUT fuses F1 and F2 on
rear of the test pattern distortion generator
(fig. 16).
c. Checklist for AN/GGM-4.
Note.
Make all the installation connections for the AN/GGM- covered in paragraphs 18 through 30. References in the checklist to the remote
pattern generator are to the test pattern distortion generator contained in the AN/GGM-(*) supplying timing signals to the AN/GGM-4.
ITEM NO.
1
INSTRUCTIONS
Operate the power supply POWER switch to
ON.
NORMAL INDICATORS
Power supply blower fan starts.
POWER indicator lamp on digital distortion
analyzer lights.
2
3
4
Operate data-scan scope POWER switch to
ON.
Operate JACK SIGNAL SELECTOR switch,
on the rear of AN/GGM-(*) supplying timing signals, to MECH.
Arrange remote pattern generator controls as
follows:
Switch
Position
DISTORTION
OFF
PERCENT DISTORTION
0
SYNCHRONOUS, STARTSTART-STOP
STOP
MARK-SPACE
Any
LEVEL CODE
5
Data-scan scope POWER indicator lamp lights.
AGO 1969A
76
CORRECTIVE MEASURES
Check AC LINE fuses on power supply (fig.
29).
Check power cord and connections
Check digital distortion analyzer ±15-vdc fuses
(fig. 8).
Check POWER indicator lamp.
Check data-scan scope fuse (fig. 10).
Check data-scan scope POWER indicator lamp.
BAUDS
PATTERN SELECTOR
5
37
TEST MESSAGE
CHARACTER RELEASE
STEADY
MARK
Arrange digital distortion analyzer controls as
follows:
Switch
INPUT POLARITY
INPUT SELECT
INPUT FILTER
BAUDS
SYNCHRONOUS, STARTSTOP
UNIT INTERVALS
TRANSMISSION SELECT
6
7
8
9
10
11
Position
+
POLAR, 20 or
30 MA
OUT
37
START-STOP
8
SPACE/
MARK ALL
DISTORTION SELECT
AVG
RESET
OFF
Using procedures described in paragraph 44,
make preliminary adjustments of data-scan
scope and then arrange unit for AUTO
sweep operation. (INTENSITY MARKERS
switch ON.)
Arrange remote pattern generator mechanical
relay loop battery for polar 30 ma operation
(par. 27).
Connect two-conductor phone plug patch cord
between remote pattern generator SIGNAL
OUTPUT jack, on AN/GGM-(*) supplying
timing signals, to digital distortion analyzer
LOWZ INPUT jack.
Operateremote pattern generator DISTORTIONswitch to SPACING BIAS, and
CHARACTER RELEASE switch to FREE
RUN.
Operate digital distortion analyzer right-hand
TRANSITION SELECT switch to 1.
Operate data-scan scope SWEEP OPTIONS
switch to TRIGGERED.
As described in paragraph 44.
If crt graticule does not light, check graticule
lamps (par. 54).
SIGNAL indicator lamp on digital distortion
analyzer lights.
Reverse position of digital distortion analyzer
INPUT POLARITY switch.
Check SIGNAL indicator lamp.
Check digital distortion analyzer -120-vdc
fuse (fig. 8).
Successive characters displayed on data-scan
scope.
Segment from middle of start space to middle
of first bit is intensified on data-scan scope
display.
Data-scan scope sweep starts with segment
selected by digital distortion analyzer righthand TRANSMISSION SELECT switch.
AGO 1969A
77
ITEM NO.
INSTRUCTIONS
12
Adjust data-scan scope INTERNAL SWEEP
MILLISECONDS, SELECT and ADJUST .
13
Operate data-scan scope CHARACTER
BLANKING SELECT switch to AUTO.
Adjust CHARACTER BLANKING, ADJUST control clockwise.
Operate data-scan scope CHARACTER
BLANKING SELECT switch to MANUAL.
Depress the SINGLE SWEEP RELEASE
switch.
Operate data-scan scope INTENSITY
MARKERS switch to OFF.
Operate data-scan scope POWER switch to off
(downward) position.
Operate digital distortion analyzer right-hand
TRANSITION SELECT switch to ALL.
Operate remote pattern generator PERCENT
DISTORTION TENS switch through each
position, observe digital distortion analyzer
indications in each switch position.
Operate digital distortion analyzer DISTORTION SELECT switch to TOTAL PEAK.
Operate remote pattern generator PERCENT
DISTORTION UNIT switch to 9.
Operate remote pattern generator PERCENT
DISTORTION TENS switch and UNITS
switches to 0.
Operate digital distortion analyzer RESET
switch to MAN RESET.
Operate remote pattern generator PERCENT
DISTORTION TENS switch to 40.
Operate remote pattern generator PERCENT
DISTORTION TENS switch to 0.
Operate digital distortion analyzer RESET
switch to AUTO and wait about 10 seconds.
Operate digital distortion analyzer RESET
switch to OFF.
Operate digital distortion analyzer DISTORTION SELECT switch to EARLY PEAK.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
NORMAL INDICATORS
CORRECTIVE MEASURES
As data-scan scope INTERNAL SWEEP
MILLISECONDS controls are advanced,
data-scan scope display is expanded.
As CHARACTER BLANKING ADJUST control is adjusted, time interval between character displays is increased.
Single character is displayed each time
SINGLE SWEEP RELEASE switch is
operated.
Intensity modulation of crt display is removed.
POWER indicator lamp goes out. Crt display
fades out.
As pattern generator distortion is increased,
digital distortion analyzer indicates late
space-to-mark distortion of 10, 20, 30, and
40 percent respectively.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indicates 49percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication
remains at 49-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication
falls to 0-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indicates 40percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication
remains at 40-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication is
reset to 0-percent distortion.
AGO 1969A
78
Check digital distortion analyzer LATE indicator lamp.
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Operate remote pattern generator PERCENT
DISTORTION TENS switch to 40.
Operate remote pattern generator DISTORTION switch to MARKING BIAS.
Operate remote pattern generator DISTORTION switch to OFF.
Operate digital distortion analyzer RESET
switch to MAN.
Operate digital distortion analyzer DISTORTION SELECT switch to LATE PEAK.
Operate remote pattern generator DISTORTION switch to SPACING BIAS.
Operate remote pattern generator DISTORTION switch to OFF.
Operate digital distortion analyzer RESET
switch to MAN RESET.
Operate digital distortion analyzer DISTORTION SELECT switch to AVG.
Operate remote pattern generator DISTORTION switch to SWITCHED BIAS.
Operate remote pattern generator DISTORTION switch to OFF.
Operate remote pattern generator PATTERN
SELECTOR switch to SELECTED CHARACTER.
Operate remote pattern generator MARKSPACE switches as follows:
MARK-SPACE switch
Position
1
MARK
2
SPACE
3
MARK
4
SPACE
5
MARK
6
SPACE
7
MARK
8
SPACE
Operate remote pattern generator LEVEL
CODE switch to 8.
Operate digital distortion analyzer UNIT INTERVALS switch to 10.
Operate remote pattern generator DISTORTION switch to SPACING BIAS.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication
remains at 0-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indicates 40percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication
remains at 40-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication
falls to 0-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indicates 40percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication
remains at 40-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication
falls to 0-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indicates 40percent distortion and EARLY and LATE
lamps light alternately.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication
falls to 0-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indicates 40percent distortion and LATE lamp lights.
AGO 1969A
79
ITEM NO.
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
INSTRUCTIONS
Operate digital distortion analyzer right-hand
TRANSITION SELECT switch to 1, 3, 4, 7,
and 9, and operate RESET switch to MAN
RESET in each position.
Operate digital distortion analyzer right-hand
TRANSITION SELECT switch to 2, 4, 6,1
and 8, and operate RESET switch to MAN
RESET in each position.
Arrange remote pattern generator selected
character MARK-SPACE switches as follows:
MARK-SPACE switch
Position
1
MARK
2
SPACE
3
SPACE
4
MARK
5
SPACE
6
MARK
7
SPACE
8
MARK
Operate digital distortion analyzer right-hand
TRANSITION SELECT switch to 2, 4, 6,
and 8, and operate RESET switch to MAN
RESET in each position.
Operate digital distortion analyzer right-hand
TRANSITION SELECT switch to 1, 3, 5, 7,
and 9, and operate RESET switch to MAN
RESET in each position.
Operate remote pattern generator PATTERN
SELECTOR switch to REVERSAL.
Operate digital distortion analyzer right-hand
TRANSITION SELECT switch to ALL.
on.
Operate digital distortion analyzer and remote
pattern generator S Y N C H R O N O U S,
START-STOP switches to SYNCHRONOUS.
Repeat items No. 49-51 with the remote pattern generator and digital distortion analyzer
BAUD switches operated to each available
baud rate.
NORMAL INDICATORS
In each switch position, digital distortion
analyzer meter indicates 40-percent distortion and LATE lamp lights.
In each switch position, digital distortion
analyzer meter indicates 0-percent distortion.
In each switch position, digital distortion
analyzer meter indicates 40-percent distortion and the LATE indicator lamp lights.
In each switch position, digital distortion
analyzer meter indicates O-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indicates 40percent distortion. LATE indicator lamp is
Digital distortion analyzer meter slowly oscillates and then settles to indicate 40-percent
distortion.
Same as items No. 50 and 51.
AGO 1969A
80
CORRECTIVE MEASURES
d. Checklist for AN/GGM-5.
Note.
Make all the installation connections for the AN/GGM-5 covered in paragraphs 18 through 30. The checklist below includes
instructions for checking one digital distortion analyzer of the AN/GGM-5; repeat the checklist procedure to check the other digital
distortion analyzer. References in the checklist to the remote pattern generator are to the test pattern distortion generator contained
in the AN/GGM-(*) supplying timing signals to the AN/GGM-5.
ITEM NO.
1
INSTRUCTIONS
Operate power supply POWER switch to ON.
NORMAL INDICATORS
Power supply blower fan starts.
POWER indicator lamps on digital distortion
analyzers light.
2
3
4
Operate JACK SIGNAL SELECTOR switch,
on rear of AN/GGM-(*) supply timing
signals, to MECH.
Arrange remote pattern generator controls as
follows:
Switch
Position
DISTORTION
OFF
PERCENT DISTORTION
0
SYNCHRONOUS, STARTSTART-STOP
STOP
MARK-SPACE
Any
LEVEL CODE
5
BAUDS
37
PATTERN SELECTOR
TEST MESSAGE
CHARACTER RELEASE
STEADY
MARK
Arrange the digital distortion analyzer controls as follows:
SwitchPosition
INPUT POLARITY
+
INPUT SELECT
POLAR 20 or
30 MA
INPUT FILTER
OUT
BAUDS
37
SYNCHRONOUS, STARTSTART-STOP
STOP
UNIT INTERVALS
8
TRANSITION SELECT
SPACE/
MARK-ALL
DISTORTION SELECT
AVG
RESET
OFF
AGO 1969A
81
CORRECTIVE MEASURES
Check AC LINE fuses on power supply (fig.
29).
Check power cord and connections.
Check digital distortion analyzer -15-vdc fuse
(fig. 8).
Check POWER indicator lamp.
ITEM NO.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
INSTRUCTIONS
Arrange remote pattern generator mechanical
relay loop battery for polar 30 ma operation
(par. 27).
Connect a two-conductor phone plug patch cord
between remote pattern generator digital
Distortion SIGNAL OUTPUT jack and
digital distortion analyzer LOW Z INPUT
jack.
Operate remote pattern generator DISTORTION switch to SPACING BIAS, and
CHARACTER RELEASE switch to FREE
RUN.
Operate digital distortion analyzer right-hand
TRANSITION SELECT switch to ALL.
Operate remote pattern generator PERCENT
DISTORTION TENS switch through each
position; observe digital distortion analyzer
indications after each movement
Operate digital distortion analyzer DISTORTION SELECT switch to TOTAL PEAK.
Operate remote pattern generator PERCENT
DISTORTION UNITS switch to 9.
Operate remote pattern generator PERCENT
DISTORTION TENS switch and UNITS
switch to 0.
Operate digital distortion analyzer RESET
switch to MAN RESET.
Operate remote pattern generator PERCENT
DISTORTION TENS switch to 40.
Operate remote pattern generator PERCENT
DISTORTION TENS switch to 0.
Operate digital distortion analyzer RESET
switch to AUTO and wait about 10 seconds.
Operate digital distortion analyzer RESET
switch to OFF.
Operate digital distortion analyzer DISTORTION SELECT switch to EARLY PEAK.
Operate remote pattern generator PERCENT
DISTORTION TENS switch to 40.
Operate remote pattern generator DISTORTION switch to MARKING BIAS.
NORMAL INDICATORS
CORRECTIVE MEASURES
SIGNAL indicator lamp on digital distortion
analyzer lights.
Reverse position of digital distortion analyzer
INPUT POLARITY switch.
Check SIGNAL indicator lamp.
Check digital distortion analyzer -120-vdc
fuse (fig. 8).
As pattern generator distortion is increased,
digital distortion analyzer indicates LATE
space-to-mark distortion of 10, 20, 30 and 40
. percent, respectively.
Check digital distortion analyzer LATE indicator lamp.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indicates 49percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication
remains at 49-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication
falls to 0-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indicates 40percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication
remains at 40-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication is
reset to O-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication
remains at 0-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indicates 40percent distortion.
AGO 1969A
82
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Operate remote pattern generator DISTORTION switch to OFF.
Operate digital distortion analyzer RESET
switch to MAN.
Operate digital distortion analyzer DISTORTION SELECT switch to LATE PEAK.
Operate remote pattern generator DISTORTION switch to SPACING BIAS.
Operate remote pattern generator DISTORTION switch to OFF.
Operate digital distortion analyzer RESET
switch to MAN.
Operate digital distortion analyzer DISTORTION SELECT switch to AVG.
Operate remote pattern generator DISTORTION switch to SWITCHED BIAS.
Operate remote pattern generator DISTORTION switch to OFF.
Operate remote pattern generator PATTERN
SELECTOR switch to SELECTED CHARACTER.
Operate remote pattern generator MARKSPACE switches as follows:
MARK-SPACE switch
Position
1
MARK
2
SPACE
3
MARK
4
SPACE
5
MARK
6
SPACE
7
MARK
8
SPACE
Operate remote pattern generator LEVEL
CODE switch to 8.
Operate digital distortion analyzer UNIT INTERVALS switch to 10.
Operate remote pattern generator DISTORTION switch to SPACING BIAS.
Operate digital distortion analyzer right-hand
TRANSITION SELECT switch to 1, 3, 5, 7,
and 9 and operate RESET switch to MAN
RESET in each position.
Digital distort. analyzer meter indication
remains at 40-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication
falls to 0-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indicates 40percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication
remains at 40-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication
falls to 0-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indicates 40percent distortion and EARLY and LATE
indicator lamps light alternately.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indication
falls to 0-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indicates 40percent distortion and LATE indicator lamp
lights.
In each switch position, digital distortion
analyzer meter indicates 40-percent distortion and LATE indicator lamp lights.
AGO 1969A
83
ITEM NO.
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
INSTRUCTIONS
Operate digital distortion analyzer right-hand
TRANSITION SELECT switch to 2, 4, 6,
and 8 and operate RESET switch to MAN
RESET in each position.
Arrange remote pattern generator MARKSPACE switches as follows:
MARK-SPACE switch
Position
1
SPACE
2
MARK
3
SPACE
4
MARK
5
SPACE
6
MARK
7
SPACE
8
MARK
Operate digital distortion analyzer right-hand
TRANSITION SELECT switch to 2, 4, 6,
and 8 and operate RESET switch to MAN
in each position.
Operate digital distortion analyzer right-hand
TRANSITION SELECT switch to 1, 3, 5, 7,
and 9 and operate RESET switch to MAN
in each position.
Operate test pattern distortion generator PATTERN SELECTOR switch to REVERSALS
Operate digital distortion analyzer right-hand
TRANSITION SELECT switch to ALL
Operate digital distortion analyzer and remote
pattern generator S Y N C H R O N O U S,
START-STOP switches to SYNCHRONOUS.
Repeat items No. 40-42 with remote pattern
generator and digital distortion analyzer
BAUDS switch operated to each available
baud rates
NORMAL INDICATORS
In each switch position, digital distortion
analyzer meter indicates 0-percent distortion.
In each switch position, digital distortion
analyzer meter indicates 40-percent distortion and the LATE lamp lights.
In each switch position, digital distortion
analyzer meter indicates 0-percent distortion.
Digital distortion analyzer meter indicates 40. percent distortion and LATE indicator lamp
is on.
Digital distortion analyzer meter slowly oscillates and then settles to indicate 40-percent
distortion.
Same as items No. 41 and 42-
AGO 1969A
84
CORRECTIVE MEASURES
54. Replacement of Data-Scan Scope Graticule Lamps
a. Remove the four screws that secure the crt bezel on the data-scan scope (fig. 33). After the b
ezel is removed,
the four graticule lamps are exposed.
b. Replace defective graticule lamps.
c. Replace the bezel and replace and tighten the four screws to secure the bezel in position.
85
CHAPTER 5
SECOND ECHELON MAINTENANCE
Item 13:
Delete CRYSTALS and PLUG-IN COILS for
the AN/GGM-3 through AN/GGM-5.
Item 14:
Delete Item 14 entirely for the AN/ GGM-1
and AN/GGM-3 through AN/ GGM-5.
Item 17:
Delete Item 17 entirely for the AN/ GGM-3
through AN/GGM-5.
Item 24:
Delete Item 24 entirely for the AN/ GGM-5.
b. Items. The information given in the chart below
is supplementary to DA Form 11-266. The item number
corresponds to the ITEM number on the form.
55. General
a. The second echelon maintenance for Test Set,
Teletypewriter AN/GGM-(*) includes:
(1) Preventive maintenance (par. 56).
(2) Visual inspection (par. 57).
(3) Troubleshooting (pars. 58 through 62).
(4) Replacement of defective tubes (par.
63)
as appropriate.
(5) Replacement of defective printed circuit
assemblies (par. 64).
(6) Replacement of component equipments
(digital distortion analyzer, power supply,
time base generator, test pattern
distortion generator, and data-scan
scope), as appropriate (par. 65).
b. Except as noted, the tools and test equipment
required for second echelon maintenance of the
AN/GGM-(*) are listed below.
(1) Tool Equipment TE-123.
(2) Test Set, Electron Tube TV-7/U (not
required for AN/GGM-5).
(3) Voltmeter TS-443/U.
(4) Multimeter TS-352/U (not required for
AN/GGM-5).
Item
12
15
17a
18
Maintenance procedure
Inspect seating of all printed circuit assemblies.
Check the printed circuit assemblies of the
digital distortion analyzer, time base generator and test pattern distortion generator
for burns, chipping, cracked or broken conductors, and dirty contacts.
Check the variable capacitors in the time base
generator for dirt or moisture.
Check air filter on power supply front panel
for dirt.
* Not applicable to the AN/GGM-4 and AN/GGM-5.
c. Additional Maintenance Information. In addition
to the items specified on DA Form 11266, the items
listed in the chart below should be checked.
56. Preventive Maintenance
a. Use of DA Form 11-266. In addition to the
items specified in paragraph 84, items 12 .through 25 on
DA Form 11-266 (figs. 36 and 37) constitute the
preventive maintenance checklist to be used by the
organizational maintenance repairman.
Items not
applicable to the equipment are lined out in the figures.
References in the ITEM block in the figures are to
paragraphs that contain additional maintenance
information on the particular item. Instructions for the
use of the form appear on the form.
Note.
Additional changes on DA Form 11266, for specific equipment, are as
follows:
Time interval
Item
AGO 1969A
86
Power supply
output voltages.
Monthly
Test pattern distortion generator loop currents'.
Weekly and each
time connections are
changed.
Maintenance
procedure
Use the procedure paragraph 30a.
Use the procedure in paragraph 30b.
Time interval
Item
Relay bias adjustment.
Weekly and each
time relay connections are
changed (neutral to polar,
etc).
Maintenance
procedure
Use the procedure in paragraph 30c.
operates properly with the replacement digital distortion
analyzer, note the symptoms on a repair tag, and
forward the defective digital distortion analyzer to higher
echelon maintenance for repair. If the AN/GGM-(*)
does not operate properly with the replacement digital
distortion analyzer, replace the original digital distortion
analyzer and troubleshoot the shelf adapter interunit
wiring by making continuity checks of the wires
connected to jack 1J3. Use the shelf adapter interunit
wiring diagram (fig. 46, 47, 48, 49, or 50) as appropriate
as a guide when making the checks.
* Not applicable to the AN/GGM-4 and AN/GGM-5.
57. Visual Inspection
Before proceeding to troubleshoot the equipment,
inspect it thoroughly to detect obvious defects. The
items listed below should be checked.
a. Seating and proper arrangement of all printed
circuit assemblies (figs. 7, 12, and 15).
b. Seating of all pluck-out items (tubes, relays,
etc.).
59.
Test
Pattern
Distortion
Generator,
Troubleshooting Procedure
When a defect is suspected in the test pattern
distortion generator, first check the unit by the visual
inspection techniques described in paragraph 57. If
these measures fail to locate the defect, apply the
assembly substitution troubleshooting method described
below to correct the defect.
a. Starting with printed circuit card assembly A1
(fig. 15), replace each printed circuit card assembly in
turn, with a new assembly (par. 64). If the new printed
circuit card assembly does not correct the defect,
remove the new assembly and replace the original. Do
not remove more than one assembly at a time. Repeat
this procedure with each printed circuit card assembly
until the defective one is located.
Note
the operational symptoms caused by
the defective printed circuit card
assembly on the repair tag and
request higher echelon maintenance.
b. If the test pattern distortion generator operates
correctly with the mechanical relay output, but the
electronic relay output is defective, replace electronic
relay assembly A1A3 (fig. 15). Request higher echelon
maintenance for defective electronic relay assembly
A1A3.
c. If, after replacing all of the printed circuit card
assemblies, the trouble is still not corrected, replace the
suspected test pattern distortion generator with one
known to be in good operating condition.
If the
AN/GGM-(*) operates properly with the replacement test
pattern distortion generator, note the symptoms on a
repair tag and forward the defective test pattern
distortion generator to higher echelon maintenance for
repair.
58.
Digital Distortion Analyzer, Troubleshooting
Procedure
When a trouble is suspected in the digital distortion
analyzer, first check the unit by the visual inspection
techniques described in paragraph 57.
If these
measures fail to locate the defect, apply the printed
circuit substitution troubleshooting method described
below to correct the defect.
a. Starting with printed circuit card assembly A1
(fig. 7), replace each printed circuit card assembly, in
turn, with a new assembly (par. 64). If the new printed
circuit card assembly does not correct the defect,
remove the new assembly and replace the original.
Repeat this procedure with each printed circuit card
assembly until the defective assembly is located.
Note
the operational symptoms caused by
the defective printed circuit card
assembly on the repair tag and
request higher echelon maintenance.
b. When applying the printed circuit substitution
troubleshooting method, always replace the original
assembly before removing the next one. Never remove
more than one assembly at a time.
c. If, after replacing all of the printed circuit card
assemblies, the trouble is still not corrected, replace the
suspected digital distortion analyzer with one known to
be in good operating condition. If the AN/GGM-(*)
AGO 1969A
87
If the AN/GGM-(*) does not operate properly with the
replacement test pattern distortion generator, replace
the original test pattern distortion generator and
troubleshoot the shelf adapter interunit wiring by making
continuity checks of the wires connected to jack 2J1.
Use the shelf adapter interunit wiring diagram (fig. 46,
47, or 48 as appropriate) as a guide when making the
checks.
61.
Time
Base
Generator,
Troubleshooting
Checklist
The chart below is provided as an aid in localizing
troubles in the time base generator to a printed circuit
card oscillator assembly. If replacing the indicated
assembly does not restore normal equipment operation,
request higher echelon maintenance. Note on the repair
tag what corrective action was taken; then remove the
defective time base generator from the AN/'GGM-(*)
(par. 65) and replace it with one known to be in
operating condition.
a. General.
Before using the troubleshooting
chart, examine the repair tag to determine whether the
trouble has been sectionalized. If there has been no
sectionalization, perform the procedures outlined in the
appropriate equipment performance checklist (par. 53).
b. Troubleshooting Chart. When performing the
checks outlined below, refer to figure 12.
60. Power Supply, Troubleshooting Procedure
a. When the component units of the AN/GGM-(*)
fail to operate, which indicates a defective power supply,
carefully inspect the unit; check for blown fuses and
incorrect seating in the shelf adapter. If the defect
cannot be located by this method, request higher
echelon maintenance.
b. If the fault appears to be the distribution of the
power supply input and output voltages, check the
distribution wiring on the shelf adapters for continuity to
power supply jack (1J2) and the other component
equipments the AN/GGM-(*). Use the shelf adapter
interunit wiring diagram (fig. 46, 47, 48, 49, or 50, as
appropriate) as a guide when making the checks.
Symptom
AN/GGM-(*) operation is defective
used with timing signals from
variable frequency oscillator
(VAR).
AN/GGM-(*) operation is defective
when operated at 37.5 bauds.
AN/GGM-(*) operation is defective
when operated at 45.5 bauds.
AN/GGM-(*) operation is defective
when operated at 61.1 bauds.
AN/GGM-(*) operation is defective
when operated at 74.2 bauds.
AN/GGM-(*) operation is defective
when operated at 112.5 bauds.
AN/GGM-(*) operation is defective
when operated at 150 bauds.
Faulty distribution of timing signals
to AN/GGM-(*) component equipments.
48 as appropriate, as guide when
making the checks.
Time base generator oscillator alarm
functions incorrectly.
Probable trouble
Corrective measures
Defective variable frequency oscillator assembly.
Replace variable frequency when
oscillator assembly.
Defective 37.5-baud oscillator assembly.
Defective 45.5-baud oscillator assembly.
Defective 61.1-baud oscillator assembly.
Defective 74.2-baud oscillator assembly.
Defective 112.5-bauds oscillator assembly.
Defective 150-baud oscillator assembly.
Defective interunit wiring.
Replace 37.5-baud oscillator assembly.
Defective alarm assembly.
Replace oscillator alarm assembly.
AGO 1969A
88
Replace 45.5-baud oscillator assembly.
Replace 61.1-baud oscillator assembly.
Replace 74.2-baud oscillator assembly.
Replace 112.5-baud oscillator assembly.
Replace 150-baud oscillator assembly.
Make continuity checks of interunit
wiring to the time base generator
jack (2J2). Use figure 46, 47, or
62. Data-Scan Scope, Troubleshooting Chart
The chart below is provided as an aid in localizing troubles in the data-scan scope. Only those corrective measures
that the second echelon maintenance man can perform are given. If the suggested corrective measure does not restore
normal equipment operation, request higher echelon maintenance. Note on the repair tag what corrective actions were
taken; then remove the defective data-scan scope from the AN/GGM-(*) and replace it with one known to be in good
operating condition.
a. General. Before using the troubleshooting chart, examine the repair tag to determine whether the trouble has
been sectionalized. If there has been no sectionalization, perform the procedure outlined in the appropriate equipment
performance checklist (par. 53).
b. Troubleshooting Chart. When performing the checks outlined below, refer to figure 38.
Symptom
Probable trouble
Insufficient or no vertical deflection.
Defective vertical cathode follower.
Defective vertical deflection amplifier.
Defective interunit wiring.
No horizontal deflection in AUTO
sweep mode. Operation normal in
other sweep modes.
Defective horizontal cathode follower.
Defective interunit wiring.
No horizontal deflection in TRIGGERED and FREE sweep modes.
Operation normal in AUTO mode.
Defective retrace trigger tube.
Defective sweep reset trigger tube.
Defective sweep cathode follower.
Defective sweep discharge tube.
Defective sweep charge gate.
Defective interunit wiring.
No horizontal deflection in any
sweep mode.
No character blanking in AUTO and
MAN modes.
No horizontal deflection in TRIGGERED sweep mode. Retrace
blanking defective in AUTO
sweep mode.
Defective horizontal sweep amplifier.
Check tube V5. Replace if defective.
Check tube V5. Replace if defective.
Check shelf adapter wiring (fig. 46,
47, 48, or 49, as appropriate) for
continuity to jack 1J1.
Check tube V5. Replace if defective.
Check shelf adapter wiring (fig. 46,
47, 48, or 49, as appropriate) for
continuity to jack 1J1.
Check tube V1. Replace if defective.
Check tube V3. Replace if defective.
Check tube V8 Replace if defective.
Check tube V9. Replace if defective.
Check tube VS. Replace if defective.
Check shelf adapter wiring (fig. 46,
47, 48, or 49 as appropriate) for
continuity to jack 1J1.
Check tube V10. Replace if defective.
Defective horizontal deflection amplifier.
Defective blanking delay tube.
Check tube V1. Replace if defective.
Defective interunit wiring.
Check shelf adapter wiring (fig. 46,
47, 48, 49, as appropriate) for continuity to jack 1J1.
Check tube V1. Replace if defective.
Defective sync gate.
Defective sweep gate generator.
Defective interunit wiring.
No retrace blanking in any sweep
mode.
No intensity modulation of datascan scope display.
Corrective measures
Check tube V2. Replace if defective.
Defective retrace blanking gate.
Check tube V4. Replace if defective.
Check shelf adapter interunit wiring (fig. 46, 47, 48, or 49, as appropriate) for continuity to jack
1J1.
Check tube V7. Replace if defective.
Defective intensity gate.
Check tube V7. Replace if defective.
AGO 1969A
89
Symptom
Probable trouble
Defective interunit wiring.
No vertical or horizontal deflection.
Data-scan scope screen is blank.
Data-scan scope display cannot be
positioned properly.
Defective high voltage rectifier.
Defective voltage regulator.
Defective cathode ray tube.
Defective regulator tube.
63. Tube Testing and Replacement
When a trouble occurs in the data-scan scope and
tube failure is suspected, use the applicable procedure
below to check the tubes.
Caution:
Do not rock or rotate a tube when
removing it from its socket; pull it
straight out with a tube puller.
a. Use of Tube Tester. Remove and test one tube
at a time. Discard a tube if its defect is obvious or if the
TV-7/U shows it to be defective. Do not discard a tube
that tests at or near its minimum test limit on the tube
tester. Put back the original tube, or insert a new tube if
required, before testing the next one.
b. Tube Substitution Method. Replace a suspected
tube with a new one. If the equipment still does not
work, remove the new tube and put back the original
one. Repeat this procedure with each suspected tube
until the defective tube is located.
Corrective measures
Check shelf adapter interunit wiring
(fig. 46, 47, 48, or 49, as appropriate) for continuity to jack 1J1.
Check tube V15. Replace if defective.
Check tube V14. Replace if defective.
Request higher echelon maintenance.
Check tubes V16, V17, V18, and V19.
Replace if defective.
b. Replacement. Make sure that identical printed
circuit assemblies are used as replacements. Forcing
an incorrect assembly into the equipment will damage
the assemblies, cause faulty operation, and may
severely damage the equipment. Carefully align the
card with the guide slots in the chassis and press the
card firmly into the connector. Replace the retainer
straps and secure them by tightening the lock screws on
the straps.
65.
Removal and Replacement of Component
Equipments
a. Removal.
To remove the component
equipments from the AN/GGM-(*), proceed as follows:
(1) Operate the power supply POWER switch
to the off (downward) position.
(2) Loosen the chassis securing knob at the
bottom center of the front panel of the
component equipment to be removed.
(3) Grasping the chassis securing knob, pull
firmly outward until the chassis is free
from the shelf adapter plug.
(4) Holding the equipment chassis by the
front and side panels, carefully withdraw it
from the AN/GGM-(*).
b. Replacement.
To replace the component
equipments in the AN/GGM-(*), proceed as follows:
(1) Support the component equipment on a
level with the applicable opening in the
shelf adapter and insert the chassis into
the opening. Press firmly on the front
panel to insure a good electrical
connection.
64.
Removal and Replacement of Printed Circuit
Card Assemblies
Use the following procedures to remove and replace
the printed circuit card assemblies, when the printed
circuit card assembly substitution troubleshooting
method is applied to the digital distortion analyzer (par.
58) and test pattern distortion generator (par. 59), or
when the printed circuit card oscillator assemblies are to
be replaced (par. 61) in the time base generator:
a. Removal. To remove the printed circuit card
assemblies, first loosen the quarter-turn lock screws
which secure the retaining straps across the card; then
remove the straps.
Carefully lift upward on the
appropriate card lever handle at the top of the card.
When the card connector is free, the card may be
withdrawn from the chassis.
AGO 1969A
90
Figure 38. Data-scan scope, tube locations
AGO 1969A
91
(2) Tighten the chassis securing knob at the
bottom center of the unit front panel to
secure the equipment in place.
(3) Operate the power supply POWER switch
to ON.
AGO 1969A
92
CHAPTER 6
SHIPMENT AND LIMITED STORAGE AND DEMOLITION
TO PREVENT ENEMY USE
Section I. SHIPMENT AND LIMITED STORAGE
66. Disassembly
a. Disconnect and remove all leads connected to
the AN/GGM-(*) rear panel terminals from external
equipment, telegraph lines, loop batteries, and the
power source.
b. If used, disconnect the time base generator
coaxial cables from the coaxial connectors on the
AN/GGM-(*).
c. If used, remove the leads and plugs connected
to the AN/GGM-(*) front panel jacks.
Note. When an AN/GGM-1, AN/GGM2, or AN/ GGM-3 is to be shipped to
another site, test pattern distortion
generator printed circuit assembly
A17 (fig. 21) must be forwarded to
Material
Waterproof paper
Waterproof tape
Corrugated cardboard
Corrugated cardboard carton
Filler material
AN/GGM-1
40 sq ft
40 ft
30 sq ft
1 each
20 lb
higher echelon maintenance for
replacement
of
call
letter
programming resistors.
67. Repackaging for Shipment or Limited Storage
The exact procedure for repackaging depends on the
material available and the conditions under which the
AN/GGM-(*) is to be shipped or stored. Adapt the
procedures outlined below whenever possible. The
information concerning the original packaging (ch. 2)
will also be helpful.
a. Material Requirements. The following materials
are required for packaging an AN/ GGM-(*). For stock
numbers of materials, consult SB 38-100.
AN/GGM-2
80 sq ft
75 ft
60 sq ft
2 each
25 lb
b. Repacking.
Package the AN/GGM-(*) as
outlined below. Refer to figure 19.
(1) Make corrugated cardboard corner
supports. Place the supports at each
corner of the shelf adapter housing or
cart.
(2) Place the AN/GGM-(*) or equipment cart
in the corrugated cardboard carton.
(3) Wrap the spare parts in waterproof paper
with applicable filler material for
cushioning and seal with waterproof tape.
AN/GGM-3
40 sq ft
40 ft
30 sq ft
1 each
20 lb
AN/GGM-4
30 sq ft
30 ft
20 sq ft
1 each
15 lb
AN/GGM-5
30 sq ft
30 ft
20 sq ft
1 each
15 lb
Place the package on top of the
AN/GGM-(*) in the corrugated cardboard
carton.
(4) Place a sheet of corrugated cardboard
over the spare parts package and close
and seal the carton with waterproof tape.
(5) Wrap the sealed corrugated cardboard
carton in waterproof paper and seal with
waterproof tape.
(6) Pack the wrapped carton in a wooden box
and nail the cover securely to the box.
AGO 1969A
93
Section II. DEMOLITION OF MATERIEL TO PREVENT ENEMY USE
68. Authority for Demolition
Demolition of the AN/GGM-(*) will be accomplished
only upon the order of the commander. The destruction
procedure outlined in paragraph 69 will be used to
prevent enemy use of the equipment.
b. Cut. Cut the cables and wiring; use axes,
handaxes, or machetes.
c. Burn. Burn the technical manuals and other
combustible items; use gasoline, kerosene, oil,
flamethrower, or incendiary grenades.
Warning:
Be extremely careful with explosives
and incendiary devices. Use these
items only when the need is urgent
d.
Explode.
If explosives are
necessary, use firearms, grenades,
or TNT.
e. Dispose. Bury or scatter the destroyed parts in
slit trenches or foxholes, or throw them into streams.
69. Methods of Destruction
Use any of the following methods to destroy the
AN/GGM-(*):
a. Smash. Smash the chassis, shelf adapters,
equipment housing, equipment cart, subassemblies,
controls, meter, and interior parts; use sledges, axes,
handaxes, hammers and crowbars.
AGO 1969A
94
Figure 39. Equipment cart wiring diagram.
AGO 1969A
95
Figure 40. Analysis periods for measurement of all character segments.
AGO 1969A
96
Figure 41. Analysis periods for total peak and average measurement of selected character segments.
(Located in back of manual)
Figure 42. Analysis periods for early peak measurement of selected character segments.
(Located in back of manual)
Figure 43. Analysis periods for late peak measurement of selected character segments.
(Located in back of manual)
Figure 44. Test Sets, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-1 and AN/GGM-3, test pattern distortion generator output circuit
configuration.
(Located in back of manual)
Figure 45. Test Set, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-2, test pattern distortion generator output circuit configuration.
(Located in back of manual)
Figure 46. Shelf adapters 1A and 2A interunit wiring diagram.
(Located in back of manual)
Figure 47. Equipment housing interunit wiring diagram.
(Located in back of manual)
Figure 48. Shelf adapters 1A and 2A interunit wiring diagram.
(Located in back of manual)
Figure 49. Shelf adapter 1A interunit wiring diagram.
(Located in back of manual)
Figure 50. Shelf adapter 1B interunit wiring diagram.
(Located in back of manual)
AGO 1969A
97
Figure 51. Data/telegraph signals with various bias distortion conditions.
AGO 1969A
98
Figure 52. Data/telegraph signals with various speed error and distortion conditions.
AGO 1969A
99
APPENDIX
REFERENCES
Following is a list of references applicable and available to the operator of Test Set, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-1,
AN,/GGM-2, AN/GGM-3, AN/GGM-4, and AN/GGM-5. In addition to the references listed below, Instruction Data on the
Use of Weston Class 50 Model, 1 Voltmeter, Voltmeter TS-44,,/U, is available.
SB 38100
SM 11-45180-S07
TB SIG 225
TM 11-655
TM 11-5527
TM 11-6625-274-12
Preservation, Packaging, and Packing Materials, Supplies, and Equipment Used by the Army
Stock List of Components of Sets, Kits, and Outfits for Tool Equipment
TE-123
Radioactive Electron Tube Handling
Fundamentals of Telegraphy (Teletypewriter)
Multimeters TS-352/U, TS352A/U, and TS-352B/U
Operator's and Organizational Maintenance Manual: Test Sets, Electron
Tube TV-7/U, TV-7A/U, TV-7B/U, and TV-7D/U
AGO 1969A
100
INDEX
Paragraph
Ac power input connections ................. 23
Adapters, shelf .................................... 13c f
Additional equipment required ............. 14
Additional maintenance information for 56c
2nd echelon.
Adjustment:
Data-scan scope ........................ 44c
Variable frequency oscillator ...... 42a
Arctic climates, operation .................... 47
Automatic character display, data44d
scan scope.
Average bias distortion measure41b
ments.
Page
32
23
23
86
64
62
67
64
61
Call-letters programming procedure .... 22
29
Cart, equipment .................................. 13b
20
Checking unpacked equipment ........... 17
36
Comments on manual ......................... 2d
3
Common names ..................................
6
7
Components:
List ............................................
5
5
Removal and replacement ......... 65
90
Connections:
Ac input power ........................... 23
32
Character release signal ............ 26
35
Digital distortion analyzer ........... 25
32
Test pattern distortion generator
27
40
Timing signals ........................... 28, 29
43
Controls and indicators ........................ 35-39 54-59
DA Form 11-266 .................................51, 56 68, 86
Data-scan scope:
Automatic character display ....... 44d
64
Controls...................................... 36
55
Description ................................
9
7
Free-running display .................. 44f
66
Graticule lamp replacement ....... 54
85
Operation ................................... 44
63
Stopping procedure .................... 44g
66
Technical characteristics ............ 4b
Triggered display ....................... 44e
66
Troubleshooting ......................... 62
89
Demolition of equipment ..................... 68
94
Description:
An/GGM-(*) ................................
7
7
Data-scan scope ........................
9
7
Digital distortion analyzer ...........
8
7
Minor components ..................... 13
20
Power supply ............................. 12
20
Test pattern distortion generator........ 11
20
Insert climates, operation .................... 49
67
Differences in models .......................... 15
23
AGO 1969A
Paragraph
Digital distortion analyzer:
Controls ..................................... 35
Description ................................
8
Input signal loop connections ..... 25
Measurements with .................... 41
Operation.................................... 41
Stopping procedure .................... 41f
Technical characteristics ............ 4a
Troubleshooting procedures ....... 58
Dimensions of AN/GGM-(*) ................. 5b
Disassembly of equipment .................. 66
Distortion:
Adjustment on test pattern distor- 43b
tion generator.
Measurements ........................... 41
Measurement techniques ........... 34
Early peak distortion measurements ....
Equipment:
Cart ...........................................
Housing .....................................
Performance checklists:
AN/GGM-1 through AN/
GGM-3.
AN/GGM-4 ..........................
AN/GGM-5 ..........................
Page
54
7
32
60
60
62
3
87
6
93
63
60
51
41e
61
13b
13a
20
20
53b
68
53c
53d
76
81
Failure alarm ....................................... 42b
Formation of selected characters, test.. 43c
pattern distortion generator.
Forms and records ..............................
2
Free-running display, data-scan scope 44f
Fundamentals of start-stop and
31-33
synchrous telegraphy.
62
63
3
66
48-50
General information:
Operation ......................... 31, 40, 46
Operator's maintenance ............. 60
Second echelon maintenance .... 65
Housing, equipment ............................ 13a
48, 66
68
86
20
Late peak distortion measurement ....... 41f
62
Maintenance:
Operator's...................................50-54
Second echelon ......................... 55-65
Materials required for repacking........... 68a
Measurement techniques .................... 34
Methods of destruction ........................ 69
Minor components, description ............ 13
Nomenclature and common names .....
6
68
86
94
51
94
20
6
101
Paragraph
Page
Official nomenclature ................
1b
3
Operation-.
Data-scan scope ..............
44
63
Digital distortion analyzer .
41
60
Paragraph references to ..
40b
60
Power supply ...................
45
66
Test pattern distortion generator 43
62
Time base generator ........
42
62
Unusual conditions ...........
46-49 66, 67
Operator's controls, indicators, and
35-39 54-59
jacks.
Oscillator failure ........................
42b
62
Packaging data .........................
16a
26
Power supply:
Controls ...........................
Description ......................
Operation .........................
Stopping procedures ........
Technical characteristics ..
Troubleshooting procedure
Preventive maintenance:
Forms ..............................
39
12
45
45b
4e
60
59
20
66
66
5
88
2c, 51,
56
Operator's ........................
51
Second echelon ...............
56
Printed circuit card assembly removal
64
and replacement.
Purpose and use .......................
3
3, 68,
86
68
86
90
Removing contents, unpacking .
16b
Replacing of AN/GGM-(*) ..........
67
Replacement procedures:
Component equipments -.. 65
90
Data-scan scope graticule lamps 54
Electron tubes .................. 63
90
Printed circuit card assemblies
64
Report of damaged or improper ship2b
ment.
26
93
Scope of manual .......................
1a
Second echelon maintenance ...
55-65
Shelf adapters ...........................
13c-f
Shipment and limited storage ....
66, 67
Start-stop:
Speed error measurements
41c
Telegraphy theory ............
32
Stopping procedure:
Data-scan scope ..............
44g
Digital distortion analyzer .
41g
Power supply ...................
45b
Test pattern distortion generator 43d
Time base generator ........
42c
Synchronous telegraphy theory .
33
Technical characteristics:
Data-scan scope ..............
4b
Digital distortion analyzer .
4a
Power supply ...................
4e
Test pattern distortion generator 4d
Time base generator ........
4c
Techniques of measurement with AN/
34
GGM-(*):
3
86-90
23
93
3
85
90
3
61
48
66
62
66
63
62
50
4
3
5
5
5
51
AGO 1969A
Paragraph
Telegraph relay, installation ......
21
Test equipment required:
Installation .......................
19
Second echelon maintenance
55b
Test pattern distortion generator:
Call-letters programming proce22
dure.
Connections .....................
27
Controls - .........................
38
Description ......................
11
Distortion adjustments .....
43b
Formation of selected characters 43b
Operation .........................
43
Stopping procedure ..........
43d
Technical characteristics ..
4d
Troubleshooting procedure
59
Test Set, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-(*):
Components ....................
5
Connection ......................
24-29
Controls ...........................
35-39
Demolition ........................
68, 69
Description ......................
7
Dimensions.......................
5b
Distortion measurement ...
34
Equipment performance checklists 53
Installation .......................
18-30
Operation .........................
40-45
Operator's maintenance ...
50-54
Second echelon maintenance 55-65
Shipment and limited storage 66, 67
Technical characteristics ..
2
Troubleshooting procedures
58-62
Time base generator:
Adjustment ......................
42a
Controls ...........................
37
Description .......................
9
Operation .........................
42
Stopping procedure ..........
42c
Technical characteristics ..
4c
Troubleshooting ...............
61
Tools, test equipment, and materials required for:
Installation ........................
19
Second echelon maintenance
55b
Total peak distortion measurements
41d
Triggered display, data-scan scope
44e
Tropical climates, operation ......
48
Troubleshooting procedures:
Data-scan scope ..............
62
Digital distortion analyzer .
58
Power supply ...................
60
Test pattern distortion generator 59
Time base generator ........
61
Tube testing and replacement ...
63
Unpacking .................................
Unsatisfactory equipment report
Variable frequency oscillator adjustment.
Visual inspection:
Operator ..........................
Second echelon ...............
102
Page
21
28
86
32
40
58
20
63
63
62
63
5
87
5
32-43
54-59
94
7
6
51
68
28-44
66
6885
86-90
93
3
87-89
62
56
7
62
62
5
88
28
86
61
66
67
89
87
88
87
88
90
16
2a
26
3
42a
62
52
57
68
8
BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF THE ARMY:
G. H. DECKER,
General, United States Army,
Chief of Staff.
Official:
J. C. LAMBERT,
Major General, United States Army,
The Adjutant General.
Distribution:
Active Army:
DASA (6)
USASA (2)
CNGB (1)
Tech Stf, DA (1)
except CSigO (18)
Tech Stf Bd (1)
USCONARC (5)
USAARTYBD (1)
USAARMBD (2)
USAIB (1)
USARADBD (2)
USAABELCTBD (1)
USAAVNBD (1)
USAATBD (1)
ARADCOM (2)
ARADCOM Rgn (2)
OS Maj Comd (3)
OS Base Comd (2)
LOGCOMD (2)
MDW (1)
Armies (2)
Corps (2)
Instl (2)
Ft Monmouth (63)
USATC AD (2)
USATC Armor (2)
USATC Engr (2)
USATC FA (2)
USATC Inf (2)
USAOMC (3)
Svc Colleges (2)
Br Svc Sch (2)
GENDEP (2) except
Atlanta GENDEP (None)
Sig Sec, GENDEP (5)
NG: None.
USAR: None.
For explanation of abbreviations used, see AR 320-50.
Sig Dep (12)
WRAMC (1)
USA Trans Tml Comd (1)
Army Tml (1)
POE (1)
OSA (1)
USAEPG (2)
AFIP (1)
AMS (1)
Army Pictorial Cen (2)
EMC (1)
Yuma Test Sta (2)
USACA (3)
USASSA (20)
USASSAMRO (1)
USASEA (1)
USA Caribbean Sig Agcy (1)
USA Sig Msl Spt Agcy (13)
Sig Fld Maint Shops (3)
USA Corps (3)
JBUSMC (2)
AFSSC (1)
Units org under fol TOE:
(2 each UNOINDC)
11-7
11-16
11-57
11-97
11-117
11-155
11-500 AA-AE (4)
11-557
11-587
11-592
11-597
U.S. Government Printing Office: 1987 0-181-421 (61087)
AGO 1969A
103
Figure 41. Analysis periods for total peak and average measurement of selected character segments.
Figure 41.
Figure 42. Analysis periods for early peak measurement of selected character segments.
Figure 42.
Figure 43. Analysis periods for late peak measurement of selected character segments.
Figure 43.
Figure 44. Test Sets, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-1 and AN/GGM-3, test pattern distortion generator output
circuit configuration.
Figure 44.
Figure 45. Test Set, Teletypewriter AN/GGM-2, test pattern distortion generator output circuit configuration.
Figure 45.
Figure 47. Equipment housing interunit wiring diagram.
Figure 47.
Figure 48. Shelf adapters 1A and 2A interunit wiring diagram.
Figure 48.
Figure 49. Shelf adapter 1A interunit wiring diagram.
Figure 49.
Figure 50. Shelf adapter 1B interunit wiring diagram.
Figure 50.
Figure 46. Shelf adapters 1A and 2A interunit wiring diagram.
Figure 46.
The Metric System and Equivalents
Linear Measure
Liquid Measure
1 centiliter = 10 milliters = .34 fl. ounce
1 deciliter = 10 centiliters = 3.38 fl. ounces
1 liter = 10 deciliters = 33.81 fl. ounces
1 dekaliter = 10 liters = 2.64 gallons
1 hectoliter = 10 dekaliters = 26.42 gallons
1 kiloliter = 10 hectoliters = 264.18 gallons
1 centimeter = 10 millimeters = .39 inch
1 decimeter = 10 centimeters = 3.94 inches
1 meter = 10 decimeters = 39.37 inches
1 dekameter = 10 meters = 32.8 feet
1 hectometer = 10 dekameters = 328.08 feet
1 kilometer = 10 hectometers = 3,280.8 feet
Square Measure
Weights
1 sq. centimeter = 100 sq. millimeters = .155 sq. inch
1 sq. decimeter = 100 sq. centimeters = 15.5 sq. inches
1 sq. meter (centare) = 100 sq. decimeters = 10.76 sq. feet
1 sq. dekameter (are) = 100 sq. meters = 1,076.4 sq. feet
1 sq. hectometer (hectare) = 100 sq. dekameters = 2.47 acres
1 sq. kilometer = 100 sq. hectometers = .386 sq. mile
1 centigram = 10 milligrams = .15 grain
1 decigram = 10 centigrams = 1.54 grains
1 gram = 10 decigram = .035 ounce
1 decagram = 10 grams = .35 ounce
1 hectogram = 10 decagrams = 3.52 ounces
1 kilogram = 10 hectograms = 2.2 pounds
1 quintal = 100 kilograms = 220.46 pounds
1 metric ton = 10 quintals = 1.1 short tons
Cubic Measure
1 cu. centimeter = 1000 cu. millimeters = .06 cu. inch
1 cu. decimeter = 1000 cu. centimeters = 61.02 cu. inches
1 cu. meter = 1000 cu. decimeters = 35.31 cu. feet
Approximate Conversion Factors
To change
To
inches
feet
yards
miles
square inches
square feet
square yards
square miles
acres
cubic feet
cubic yards
fluid ounces
pints
quarts
gallons
ounces
pounds
short tons
pound-feet
pound-inches
Multiply by
centimeters
meters
meters
kilometers
square centimeters
square meters
square meters
square kilometers
square hectometers
cubic meters
cubic meters
milliliters
liters
liters
liters
grams
kilograms
metric tons
Newton-meters
Newton-meters
2.540
.305
.914
1.609
6.451
.093
.836
2.590
.405
.028
.765
29,573
.473
.946
3.785
28.349
.454
.907
1.356
.11296
To change
ounce-inches
centimeters
meters
meters
kilometers
square centimeters
square meters
square meters
square kilometers
square hectometers
cubic meters
cubic meters
milliliters
liters
liters
liters
grams
kilograms
metric tons
To
Newton-meters
inches
feet
yards
miles
square inches
square feet
square yards
square miles
acres
cubic feet
cubic yards
fluid ounces
pints
quarts
gallons
ounces
pounds
short tons
Temperature (Exact)
°F
Fahrenheit
temperature
5/9 (after
subtracting 32)
Celsius
temperature
°C
Multiply by
.007062
.394
3.280
1.094
.621
.155
10.764
1.196
.386
2.471
35.315
1.308
.034
2.113
1.057
.264
.035
2.205
1.102
PIN: 023263-000
This fine document...
Was brought to you by me:
Liberated Manuals -- free army and government manuals
Why do I do it? I am tired of sleazy CD-ROM sellers, who take publicly
available information, slap “watermarks” and other junk on it, and sell it.
Those masters of search engine manipulation make sure that their sites that
sell free information, come up first in search engines. They did not create it...
They did not even scan it... Why should they get your money? Why are not
letting you give those free manuals to your friends?
I am setting this document FREE. This document was made by the US
Government and is NOT protected by Copyright. Feel free to share,
republish, sell and so on.
I am not asking you for donations, fees or handouts. If you can, please
provide a link to liberatedmanuals.com, so that free manuals come up first in
search engines:
<A HREF=http://www.liberatedmanuals.com/>Free Military and Government Manuals</A>
– Sincerely
Igor Chudov
http://igor.chudov.com/
– Chicago Machinery Movers
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement